204
PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho in U.S.A. Part No. M -0009500-0289 November, 1993 TP1410

PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    14

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL

and

Super-Precision CNC LathesEquipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control

Manual No. M-289 Litho in U.S.A.Part No. M -0009500-0289 November, 1993

TP1410

Page 2: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTICE -

Damage resulting from misuse, negligence, or accident is not covered by theHardinge Machine Warranty.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

This manual covers the programming of Hardinge CHNC® III and CHNC IIISPSuper-Precision® CNC lathes equipped with the Fanuc 18T control.

In no event will Hardinge Inc. be responsible for indirect or consequential damageresulting from the use or application of the information in this manual.

Reproduction of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission ofHardinge Inc. is prohibited.

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

- WARNINGS -Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of personal injury ordamage to the machine, tooling, or workpiece.

- CAUTIONS -Cautions must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of damage to the ma-chine, tooling, or workpiece.

- NOTES -Notes contain supplemental information.

Hardinge Inc.One Hardinge Drive

P.O. Box 1507Elmira, New York 14902-1507

www.hardinge.com

© 1993, Hardinge Inc. M-289

Page 3: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

READ THIS INFORMATION CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATINGMACHINE OR PERFORMING MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

- NOTE -Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Hazard CommunicationStandard 1910.1200, effective September 23, 1987, and various state “employeeright-to-know laws” require that information regarding chemicals used with this ma-chine be supplied to you. The list of chemicals appears in manual M-179, the Ma-terial Safety Data Sheets (MSDS’s). Refer to the applicable section of the MSDS’ssupplied with your machine when handling, storing, or disposing of chemicals.Store MSDS’s of other chemicals used with this Hardinge machine in the packetcontaining manual M-179.

HARDINGE SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONSYour Hardinge machine is designed and built for maximum ease and safety of operation.

Some previously accepted shop practices may not reflect current safety regulations and proce-dures, they should be re-examined to insure compliance with the current safety and health stan-dards.

Hardinge Inc. recommends that all shop supervisors, maintenance personnel, and machinetool operators be advised of the importance of safe maintenance, setup, and operation of allequipment. Our recommendations are described below. READ THESE SAFETY RECOMMEN-DATIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING ANY FURTHER.

READ THE APPROPRIATE MANUAL OR INSTRUCTIONS before attempting operation,programming, or maintenance of the machine. Make certain that you understand all instruc-tions.

CONSULT YOUR SUPERVISOR when in doubt as to the correct way to do a job.

DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT unless proper maintenance has been regularly performedand the equipment is known to be in good working order.

WARNING and INSTRUCTION TAGS are mounted on the machine for your safety and infor-mation. Do not remove them.

DON’T ALTER THE MACHINE to bypass any interlock, overload, disconnect switch, or othersafety device.

WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND PROPER FOOT PROTECTION at all times. Wear a respi-rator, helmet, gloves, and ear muffs or plugs when necessary.

DON’T OPERATE ANY MACHINE while wearing rings, watches, jewelry, loose clothing, .and/or neckties. Long hair must be contained by a net or shop cap for safety.

DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT if unusual or excessive heat, noise, smoke, or vibration oc-curs. Report any excessive or unusual conditions as well as any damaged parts to your su-pervisor.

ALLOW ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL to have access to enclosures containing electri-cal equipment.

M-289 i

Page 4: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

MAKE CERTAIN that the equipment is properly grounded. Consult and comply with the Na-tional Electric Code and all local codes.

DON’T TOUCH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT when hands are wet or when standing on a wetsurface.

DISCONNECT MAIN ELECTRICAL POWER before attempting repair or maintenance.

DON’T REACH into any control or power case area unless electrical power is OFF.

REPLACE BLOWN FUSES with fuses of the same size and type as originally furnished.DON’T ALLOW the operation or repair of equipment by untrained personnel.

ASCERTAIN AND CORRECT the cause of any shutdown before restarting the machine.KEEP THE AREA AROUND THE MACHINE well lighted and dry.

KEEP CHEMICALS AND FLAMMABLE MATERIAL away from operating equipment.

HAVE THE CORRECT TYPE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER handy when machining combusti-ble material and keep the chips clear of the work area.

DON’T USE a toxic or flammable substance as a solvent cleaner or coolant.

INSPECT ALL SAFETY DEVICES AND GUARDS to make certain that they are in good con-dition and are functioning properly.

MAKE CERTAIN THAT PROPER GUARDS are in place and that all doors and covers are inplace and secured before starting a machining cycle.

DON’T OPEN GUARDS while any machine component is in motion. Make certain that allpeople in the area are clear of the machine when opening the guard door.

MAKE SURE that chucks, closers, fixture plates, and all other spindle-mounted work-holdingdevices are properly mounted.

MAKE CERTAIN that all tooling is secured in position before starting the machine.

DON’T USE worn or defective hand tools. Use the proper size and type tool for the job beingperformed.

USE CAUTION around exposed mechanisms and tooling especially when setting up. Becareful of sharp edges on tools.

USE ONLY a soft-faced hammer on turret tools and fixtures.

MAKE CERTAIN that all tool mounting surfaces are clean before mounting tools.

DON’T USE worn or broken tooling on the machine.

INSPECT ALL CHUCKING DEVICES daily to make certain that they are in good operatingcondition. Replace any defective chuck before operating the machine. ,~ “’J

ii M-289

Page 5: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ANY ATTACHMENT, TOOL, OR MACHINE MODIFICATION not obtained from HardingeInc., must be reviewed by a qualified safety engineer before installation.

USE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE gripping pressure on the chuck. Consider the weight, shape,and balance of the workpiece.

USE LIGHTER THAN NORMAL feed rates and depth of cut when machining a workpiece di-ameter that is larger than the gripping diameter.

DON’T EXCEED the rated capacity of the machine.

DON’T LEAVE tools, workpieces or other loose items where they can come in contact with amoving component of the machine.

REMOVE ANY LOOSE PARTS OR TOOLS from the work area. Always clear the machineand work area of tools and parts especially after work has been completed by maintenancepersonnel.

REMOVE CHUCK WRENCHES before starting the machine.

CHECK THE SETUP, TOOLING, AND SECURE THE WORKPIECE if the machine hasbeen turned OFF for any length of time.

CHECK THE LUBRICATION AND COOLANT LEVELS and the status of control indicatorlights before operating the machine.

KNOW WHERE ALL EMERGENCY STOP push buttons are located.

MAKE CERTAIN THAT PROPER FUNCTIONS are programmed and that all controls are setin the desired modes before pressing the Cycle Start push button.

CHECK THE TURRET POSITION before pressing the Cycle Start push button.

DRY CYCLE a new setup to check for programming errors.

DON’T ADJUST tooling or coolant hoses while the machine is running.

KEEP CLEAR of any “pinch point” and any potentially hazardous situation.

DON’T LEAVE the machine unattended while it is operating.

DON’T REMOVE OR LOAD workpieces while any part of the machine is in motion.

BE CAREFUL of sharp edges when handling newly machined workpieces.

DON’T CHECK the finish or dimension of a workpiece near a running spindle or movingslide.

DON’T JOG SPINDLE in either direction when checking threads with a thread gage.

DON’T ATTEMPT to brake or slow the machine with hands or any makeshift device.

M-289 iii

Page 6: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DON’T REMOVE CHIPS with hands. Make certain that all machine movement has stoppedand then use a hook or similar device to remove chips and shavings.

DON’T CLEAN the machine with an air hose.

KEEP TOTE PANS a safe distance from machine. Don’t overfill the tote pans.

DON’T LET STOCK project past the back end of the collet closer or machine spindle withoutbeing adequately covered and properly supported.

MAKE CERTAIN that any bar feed mechanism is properly aligned with the spindle. If the barfeed is a floor-mounted type, it must be securely bolted to floor.

USE FEED TUBE BUSHINGS when using a bar feed.

FOR YOUR PROTECTION - WORK SAFELY

iv M-289

Page 7: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGEIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Programming the Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Legal Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Special Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Programming Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Tape Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Keyboard Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6X and Z Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Decimal Point Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Data Word Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8O Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8N Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8G Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

G00 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9G01 Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9G02 Counterclockwise Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9G03 Clockwise Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10G04 Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10G10 Offset Value Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10G20 Inch Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G21 Metric Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G41 TNRC - Workpiece Left of Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G42 TNRC - Workpiece Right of Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G50 Maximum RPM Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G65 Macro Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G71 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G72 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G73 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G76 Automatic Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G92 Canned Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G94 Canned Facing Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G96 Constant Surface Speed (CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G97 Direct RPM Programming (CSS Cancel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G98 Inches/Millimeter per Minute Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G99 Inches/Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

X Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18U Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

M-289 v

Page 8: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Z Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20W Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21B Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21I Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21K Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Variable Lead Threading (G34) [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

R Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Linear Interpolation (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Defining Tapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

P Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Q Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24F Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25S Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25T Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26M Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

M00 Program Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27M01 Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27M02 End of Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27M03 Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27M04 Spindle Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27M05 Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27M08 Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M09 Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M13 Spindle Forward/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M14 Spindle Reverse/Coolant ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M21 Open Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M22 Close Collet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M23 Vertical Slide IN [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M24 Vertical Slide and Part Chute IN [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M25 Vertical Slide and/or Parts Chute Retract [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M26 Parts Chute IN [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28M28 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29M29 Internal Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29M30 End of Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29M31 Program Rewind and Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29M98 Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29M99 Subprogram End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Diameter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

General Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

vi M-289

Page 9: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIONIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Tool Orientation Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2To Activate TNRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Entering and Exiting the Workpiece with TNRC Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5To Switch G41/G42 Code with TNRC Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Axis Reversals with TNRC Active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Modes in which TNRC is Not Performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Multiple Repetitive Cycles with TNRC Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Canned Turning and Facing Cycles with TNRC Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Tool Moved Away from the Workpiece with TNRC Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9TNRC Related Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Alarm 033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Alarm 034 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Alarm 038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Alarm 039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Alarm 040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Alarm 041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

To Cancel TNRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9TNRC Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATIONFeedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Absolute and Incremental Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Insert Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6G02 Counterclockwise Arc (CCW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6G03 Clockwise Arc (CW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Circular Interpolation Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

M-289 vii

Page 10: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETSWork Shift (Zero Offset). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Establishing Z Axis Work Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storing a Work Shift Offset from fhe Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5To Store Tool Geometry Offsets in Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Setting Tool Offsets for Non-Center Working Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Setting Tool Offsets for Center-Working Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Resetting Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Tool Nose Radius Value and Orientation Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12To Store Tool Offsets from the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Adjusting Tool Wear Offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Rules for Adjusting Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Activating Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMHow the Control Positions the Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Reference Home (Zero Return) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

How the Machine Establishes the Reference Point Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3X and Z Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Rectangular Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLESCanned Turning Cycle (G90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

G90 Straight Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1G90 Taper Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Turning (G71/G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5G71/G70 Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6G71 Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Canned Facing Cycle (G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10G94 Straight Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10G94 Taper Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Facing (G72/G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14G72/G70 Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15G72 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19G73/G70 Pattern Repeat Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20G73 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24G70 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

viii M-289

Page 11: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Constant Depth Increment Auto Drilling and Grooving Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25G74 Auto Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Data Block Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25CHNC® III Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Q Word Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26CHNC III Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26CHNC IIISP Super-Precision Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

G74 Auto Drilling Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27G75 Auto Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Data Block Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28CHNC III Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28CHNC IIISP Super-Precision Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

P and Q Word Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30CHNC III Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30CHNC IIISP Super-Precision Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Tool Movement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30G75 Auto Grooving Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

Variable Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

CHNC III Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33CHNC IIISP Super-Precision Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

Positioning the Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34Calculating the Drill Pass Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35Optional Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLESFeedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Single Block Threadcutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

To Establish a Start Point for Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3G32 Constant Lead Threadcutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

G32 Straight Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4G32 Tapered Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

G92 Canned Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6G92 Straight Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6G92 Tapered Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Plunge and Compound Infeed Threading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Plunge Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Compound Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Data Block Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

CHNC III Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11CHNC IIISP Super-Precision Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

G76 Straight Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13G76 Tapered Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14G76 Parameter Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15G76 Execution Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15G76 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

M-289 ix

Page 12: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Data Word Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

G34 Variable Lead Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Left-Hand Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Threading from Left to Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Z Depth Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

CHAPTER 8 - INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICESData Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Tape Parity Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Checking and Modifying Communications Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2I/O Port Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3I/O Port Parameter Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Baud Rate Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Stop Bit Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Data Transfer to the Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Uploading Control Parameters into Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Uploading Part Programs into Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Uploading Tool Offsets into Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Data Transfer from the Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Downloading Control Parameters from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Downloading Part Programs from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Downloading Tool Offsets from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

CHAPTER 9 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMINGIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Defining Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Blueprint Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Example 1: Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Example 2: Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Example 3: Three Points with a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Example 4: Three Points withaA Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Example 5: Four Points with Two Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Example 6: Four Points with Two Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Example 7: Four Points with One Radius and Chamfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Example 8: Four Points with One Chamfer and Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Blueprint Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

x M-289

Page 13: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 10 - MISCELLANEOUSConstant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Spindle Orient [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Determining Spindle Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Absolute Spindle Orient (C Word) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Incremental Spindle Orient (H Word) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Programming Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Sample Program Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Canceling Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4MDI Keyboard Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Tape or Disk Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Calling Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Safe Start/End Subprogram O1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Hardinge Permanent Macro Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Macro 9111: Safe Tool Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Macro 9135: Deep Hole Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Macro 9150: Collet Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Recommended Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9To Set the Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

English/Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

APPENDIXTurret Top Plate Travel Specifcations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Turret Top Plate Dimensions:

Eight Station Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2Four Station Gang Tool Top Plate [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

G Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4Standard M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5Optional M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5PMC Generated Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6PMC Generated Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

M-289 xi

Page 14: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

xii M-289

Page 15: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGE

INTRODUCTIONA part program is an ordered set of instructions which define slide and spindle motion as well

as auxiliary functions. These instructions are written in a part program language consisting of aseries of data blocks. Each data block contains adequate information for the machine tool toperform one or more machine functions.

A data block consists of one or more data words, which are treated together as a unit. Eachdata word consists of a word address followed by a numerical value. A word address is a letterwhich specifies the meaning of the data word.

The value of the number that follows the word address has a format which specifies the num-ber of characters the word contains as well as the range these values must fall within. Theseformats are outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tables onpages 1-2 and 1-3.

PROGRAMMING THE CONTROLProgramming the Hardinge CHNC® III or CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® CNC lathe requires an

understanding of the machine, tooling, and control.

Extreme care must be exercised when writing a part program or punching a tape since allmachine movements will be executed as programmed. A miscalculation or selection of an incor-rect function can result in an incorrect motion.

The basic unit for part program input is the Block. Normally, one line or block of informationrepresents one describable operation or several describable operations that are independent ofeach other. (For example, axis movement and spindle speed changes are independent opera-tions which may be programmed in the same block.) A block may contain any or all of the fol-lowing:

1. Slash code (/)

2. Sequence number (N Function)

3. Preparatory Functions (G Functions)

4. Axis Movement Instructions (X or U and Z or W Functions)

5. Feedrate Command (F Function)

6. Spindle Speed Command (S Function)

7. Turret Station (T Function)

8. Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions)

A block MUST contain a valid End of Block character.

M-289 1-1

Page 16: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

1-2 M-289

FUNCTION(Word)

PREPARATORYCOMMANDS

INCH MODE (G20) METRIC MODE (G21)

Format Min. Max. Format Min. Max.

O (Prog. #)N (Block #)G (Command)M (Command)P (Block #)P (Dwell)Q (Block #)

-------

O4N4G2M2P4P8Q4

1100111

89999999

9999

999999999999

9999

O4N4G2M2P4P8Q4

1100111

89999999

9999

999999999999

9999

U (Coordinate)U (Dwell)W (Coordinate)X (Coordinate)X (Dwell)Z (Coordinate)

G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01, G02, G03G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01, G02, G03

U±1.4U5.3

W±2.4X±1.4X5.3

Z±2.4

0.00010.0010.00010.00010.0010.0001

-99999.999

-6.2000

99999.99912.5500

U±3.3U5.3

W±3.3X±3.3X5.3

Z±3.3

0.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.001

-99999.999

-157.480

99999.999318.770

X (Tool Offset)X (Wear OffsetX (Zero Offset)Z (Tool Offset)Z (Wear Offset)Z (Zero Offset)

G10G10G10G10G10G10

X±1.4X±0.4X±1.4Z±2.4Z±0.4Z±2.4

0.0.0.0.0.0.

-0.5000--0.5000-

X±3.3X±2.3X±3.3Z±3.3Z±2.3Z±3.3

0.0.0.0.0.0.

-12.700

--

12.700-

I (Circ. Inter.)K (Circ. Inter.)K (Lead Change)

G02, G03G02, G03G34

I±3.4K±3.4K±1.6

0.0.0.000001

999.9999999.9999

9.999999

I±4.3K±4.3K±3.4

0.0.0.0001

9999.9999999.999

500.0000

F (per min) [X/U]F (per min) [Z/W]F (per rev)F (Thread Lead)

G98G98G99G32, G33, G34

F3.2F3.2F1.6F1.6

0.010.010.0000010.000001

400.00400.00

9.9999999.999999

F5.0F5.0F3.4F3.4

1.1.

.001

.0001

10160.10160.

500.0000500.0000

S (RPM Limit)S (CSS)S (Direct RPM)

G50G96G97

S4S4S4

010

500099995000

S4S4S4

010

500099995000

B (Spin. Orient) - B3 0 359 B3 0 359

T (Tool Function) - T4 0 0832 T4 0 0832

,A (Angle),C (Chamfer)R (Radius),R (Radius)

G00, G01G01G02, G03G01

,A3.4,C2.4R2.4

,R2.4

0.00010.0001-0.0001

359.9999---

,A3.4,C3.3R3.3

,R3.3

.001

.001-.001

359.9999---

Table 1.1 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments(CHNC® III Lathes)

Page 17: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M-289 1-3

FUNCTION(Word)

PREPARATORYCOMMANDS

INCH MODE (G20) METRIC MODE (G21)

Format Min. Max. Format Min. Max.

O (Prog. #)N (Block #)G (Command)M (Command)P (Block #)P (Dwell)Q (Block #)

-------

O4N4G2M2P4P8Q4

1100111

89999999

9999

999999999999

9999

O4N4G2M2P4P8Q4

1100111

89999999

9999

999999999999

9999

U (Coordinate)U (Dwell)W (Coordinate)X (Coordinate)X (Dwell)Z (Coordinate)

G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01, G02, G03G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01, G02, G03

U±1.5U5.3

W±2.5X±1.5X5.3

Z±2.5

0.000010.0010.000010.000010.0010.00001

-99999.999

-6.20000

99999.99912.55000

U±3.4U5.3

W±3.4X±3.4X5.3

Z±3.4

0.00010.00010.00010.00010.00010.0001

-99999.999

-157.4800

99999.999318.7700

X (Tool Offset)X (Wear OffsetX (Zero Offset)Z (Tool Offset)Z (Wear Offset)Z (Zero Offset)

G10G10G10G10G10G10

X±1.5X±0.5X±1.5Z±2.5Z±0.5Z±2.5

0.0.0.0.0.0.

-0.50000--0.50000-

X±3.4X±2.4X±3.4Z±3.4Z±2.4Z±3.4

0.0.0.0.0.0.

-12.7000

--

12.7000-

I (Circ. Inter.)K (Circ. Inter.)K (Lead Change)

G02, G03G02, G03G34

I±3.5K±3.5K±1.6

0.0.0.000001

999.99999999.99999

9.999999

I±4.4K±4.4K±3.4

0.0.0.0001

9999.99999999.9999

500.0000

F (per min) [X/U]F (per min) [Z/W]F (per rev)F (Thread Lead)

G98G98G99G32, G33, G34

F3.2F3.2F1.6F1.6

0.010.010.0000010.000001

400.00400.00

9.9999999.999999

F5.0F5.0F3.4F3.4

1.1.

.001

.0001

10160.10160.

500.0000500.0000

S (RPM Limit)S (CSS)S (Direct RPM)

G50G96G97

S4S4S4

010

500099995000

S4S4S4

010

600099995000

B (Spin. Orient) - B3 0 359 B3 0 359

T (Tool Function) - T4 0 0832 T4 0 0832

,A (Angle),C (Chamfer)R (Radius),R (Radius)

G00, G01G01G02, G03G01

,A3.4,C2.5R2.5

,R2.5

0.00010.00001-0.00001

359.9999---

,A3.4,C3.4R3.4

,R3.4

.001

.0001-.0001

359.9999---

Table 1.1 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments(CHNC® IIISP Super-Precision® Lathes)

Page 18: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

LEGAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS

Legal alpha characters are those used as word addresses in a part program block that thecontrol will accept and act on. All illegal alpha characters input through the RS-232 serial portwill be loaded into memory, but will result in a decoding error when program execution is at-tempted. The illegal character must be removed or replaced with a legal character. The followingcharacters are illegal:

D, E, J, L, V, and Y

SPECIAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS

An End of Record character should be the first and last character in a program which is to beuploaded to the machine control through the RS-232 serial port. If multiple programs are to beloaded from a single punched tape, it may be desirable to place an End of Record character be-tween each of the programs. All End of Record characters will be followed by an End of Blockcharacter.

The End of Block character must be used after the last character in each data block of a partprogram that is to be loaded into the memory of the control. If the End of Block character isomitted from a part program data block, the control will consider the next block to be part of theblock missing the End of Block. This may cause undesirable machine behavior.

The End of Block character is a Carriage Return (CR) character in EIA (RS-224-B) format anda Line Feed (L/F) character in ASCII (ISO) (RS-358-B) format. When programming from the key-board, use the EOB key. This character will be displayed as a semicolon (;) on the control dis-play screen.

Operator messages and comments can be included in a part program loaded from tape, pro-vided they are enclosed in parentheses. Any legal ASCII character can be used when writing acomment.

The Block Delete (/) code inserted at the beginning of a data block will cause that block ofdata to be ignored by the control when Block Delete is activated by the machine operator. WhenBlock Delete is not active, the data block will be executed.

PROGRAMMING FORMAT

Programs to be executed by the control consist of alpha-numeric words that the control recog-nizes as specific commands. These words consist of one letter addresses and the designatednumbers for that address. Words within a block may follow any convenient sequence. However,Hardinge recommends the following sequence:

/, N, G, X, Z, U, W, B, C, I, K, P, Q, R, A, F, S, T, M

The software for the system is configured to provide the following programming resolution:

CHNC® III machine: .0001 inch [.001 mm]CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® machine .00001 inch [.0001 mm]

This causes specific data word formats to be applied to the associated values. These formatsare outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tables on pages 1-2and 1-3. These numbers indicate the maximum number of places allowed to the right and left ofthe decimal point.

A plus sign need not be entered since the control assumes plus if no sign is entered. A minussign MUST be programmed, if needed.

The general part program format is shown on page 1-31. The Safe Start Subprogram shownin the program format is described in Chapter 10 of this manual.

1-4 M-289

Page 19: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

Tape Programming SequenceThe sequence in which a tape should be programmed is as follows:

1. A few inches of tape feed (leader), as required.

2. Enter program ID code and program number. All programs are identified by the letter “O” infront of the part program ID number and may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999). Pro-gram numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program ID codeand program number are followed by a valid End of Block character.

3. Enter the program.

4. End of Program command (M02, M30) in the last data block. All data blocks must end witha valid End of Block character.

5. Enter an End of Record character.

6. A few inches of tape feed (trailer), as required.

Keyboard Programming SequenceTo program from the keyboard, follow this procedure:

1. Press the Edit push button.

2. Press the Program key.

3. Turn the Program Protect key switch OFF.

- NOTE -Part programs are identified by the letter “O” in front of the part program ID numberand may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999). Program numbers 9000 through9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program ID code and program numberare followed by a valid End of Block character. An example of a program numberis “O2222".

4. Enter the program ID code and program number; then, press the Insert key. The currentlyactive program is cleared from the display. The new program number and the End of Re-cord character are displayed.

5. Press the EOB (;) key; then, press the Insert key.

6. Type in the required program using the keyboard. The Insert key is used to enter the datainto the program.

NOTEA valid End of Block character must be entered at the end of each data block.

7. The End of Program command (M02 or M30) must be placed at the end of the program,followed by a valid End of Block character.

8. Turn the Program Protect key switch ON.

M-289 1-5

Page 20: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

PROGRAM NUMBER

Part programs stored in the control memory must be assigned a part program number. Theprogram numbers are used by the control to identify the various programs and subprogramswhich are stored in the control memory.

The program number MUST be identified by the letter “O” followed by the program identifica-tion number. It is not necessary to program the leading zeros as these are automatically insertedby the control, when needed. The program number must be on the first line of the program. Itmay be programmed on a line by itself or it may be the first entry in the first data block.

The part program numbers range from 1 to 8999. However, the following restrictions must beobserved when assigning program numbers:

1. Alpha and other miscellaneous characters (such as dashes) are not allowed.

2. Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for permanent macro programs enteredon the Master Macro Tape. These numbers cannot be assigned to other part programs ormacros.

- NOTE -When entering a program from the keyboard, if the program identification numberis omitted, the active part program will be edited according to the data enteredwhen the Insert key is pressed. If one of the 9000 series permanent macro pro-grams is active and no program number is entered, the first program data block willbe rejected and the message “Write Protect” will be displayed on the control dis-play screen.

When a tape which does not contain a program identification number is loaded into memory,the control will automatically assign the first programmed sequence number as the programnumber.

Any attempt to store programs having numbers already stored in program memory will causethe message “Already Exists” to be displayed on the control display screen. This message indi-cates that the program identification number has already been assigned.

X AND Z AXES

The axis of motion parallel to the spindle face is the X axis and the axis of motion parallel tothe spindle centerline is the Z axis. From this point on, the cross slide will be referred to as theX axis and the carriage as the Z axis. These letter designations for the two axes are recom-mended by the Electronic Industries Association (E.I.A.). In an effort to promoteinterchangeability and prevent misunderstandings between CNC manufacturers and purchasers,recommended standards have been set forth by E.I.A. These standards include the following:axis designation, axis motion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape, operationalcommand format, data format, and electrical interface between controls and machine tools.

1-6 M-289

Page 21: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

A decimal point should be used with the following address words: A, C, F, I, K, R, U, W, X,and Z. If a decimal point is programmed in a word in which a decimal point is not allowed (P, Q,or B word) or if two or more decimal points appear in any one data word, an error message willbe displayed.

Values with or without decimal points may be commanded in the same data block.

Trailing zeros need not be programmed when using decimal point programming.

If no decimal point is programmed, the control uses the appropriate data word format to insertleading zeros and properly position the decimal point.

Example: In Inch mode on the CHNC® IIISP Super-Precision® machine, the format for theZ word is ±2.5 . If Z4. is programmed, the control will assume Z4.00000 .

- CAUTION -The programmer must make certain all decimal points are correctly positionedto prevent undesirable machine behavior.

This assumed decimal point is an important concept to keep in mind. There can be a greatdeal of difference between values with and without decimal points.

Example: The command “X2.” sends the cross slide to coordinate X2.00000; however, thecommand “X2" (no decimal point) sends the cross slide to X.00002 . Be sure thedecimal point is programmed when allowed.

In addition to specifying the location of the assumed decimal point, the word address formatalso indicates the maximum number of digits which can appear to the left and right of the deci-mal point.

M-289 1-7

Page 22: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONSOn the following pages are descriptions of the data words used with Hardinge CHNC® III and

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathes.

O WORD

The O word is used as the letter address for part program numbers and must precede thepart program identification number. Refer to “Program Number”, on page 1-6.

N WORD

The N word provides a sequence number consisting of the letter “N” and up to four digits(0000 - 9999). It is not required to have a sequence number in any block. When used, they maybe placed anywhere in the block; however, it is customary to program them as the first word inthe block, except when a Block Delete (/) is programmed. Block Delete codes, when pro-grammed, will be the first character in a block.

The N word does not affect machine operation. However, it does give operators a valuablereference should they wish to relate an operation being performed to the program manuscript.

The numbering sequence can begin with any number, such as N0001. It is recommended thatthe programmer assign sequence numbers in intervals of five or ten so that additional blockscan be inserted into the program if necessary. This eliminates the necessity of reassigning se-quence numbers after blocks are added to the program. The only exception to this recommen-dation is that the block starting each operation be assigned the number of the turret station to beused for that operation. For example, when using turret station #6, N6 will be the block numberto start the operation.

Leading zeros may be omitted.

G WORD

The G word is a preparatory command which sets up the control for a specific type of opera-tion. It has the word format G2, with a range of 00 to 99. Certain G codes are default codes andare automatically activated by the control under the following conditions:

1. Machine Power-up

2. Reading an End of Program Code (M02/M30)

3. Control Reset

4. Emergency Stop

The G codes are of two types:

1. Non-modal G codes are effective only in the block in which they are programmed.

2. Modal G codes remain effective until replaced by another G code in the same group.

The chart in the Appendix lists the G codes by groups.

Only one G code from each group is permitted in a data block. If more than one G code froma group is programmed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the last of the conflicting Gcodes entered in the data block will be the active G code.

G codes containing a leading zero may be programmed without the zero.

Example: G01 may be programmed as G1

1-8 M-289

Page 23: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G00 Positioning(Group 1 G Code)

This positioning command generates linear motion on one or more axes (X or Z) from the cur-rent position to the programmed end points at a rate determined by the % Feedrate / % RapidOverride switch. When this switch is set to 100%, axis motion takes place at the rapid traverserate of 400 inches per minute [10160 millimeters per minute].

Axis distance may be expressed as X and Z for absolute moves or U and W for incrementalmoves.

The programmed feedrate (F Function) is ignored by the control when G00 is active.

When the turret is programmed to move in both axes (X & Z), the axes execute a vectorialmove at a traverse rate which is a result of the X and Z rapid traverse. When a G00 positioningmove is programmed and the % Rapid Override switch is set to 100%, both axes will move atmaximum traverse.

The G00 command is modal. A programmed G00 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G00 command.

G01 Linear Interpolation(Group 1 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. Linear Interpolation generates linear motion on one ormore axes (X or Z) from the current position to the programmed end points at a rate specifiedby a feedrate command in the same block or by an active feedrate from a preceding block. Theprogrammed feedrate is directly affected by the %Feedrate / % Rapid Override switch. The max-imum programmable feedrate is 400 inches per minute [10160 millimeters per minute] on the Xand Z axis.

Axis distance may be expressed as X and Z for absolute moves or U and W for incrementalmoves. When both the X and Z axes are programmed for a taper cut, the control will compen-sate X and Z axis feedrates to produce a vectorial velocity equal to the programmed feedrate.That is, when both axes are programmed, a vectorial move is generated.

The G01 command is modal. A programmed G01 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G01 command.

G02 Counterclockwise Arc(Group 1 G Code)

Refer to Figure 3.4 for the path traced by the tool for a counterclockwise arc.

The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when lookingdownward at the plan view of the workpiece.

The G02 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) to pro-vide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.

The G02 command is modal. A programmed G02 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G02 command.

Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.

M-289 1-9

Page 24: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G03 Clockwise Arc(Group 1 G Code)

Refer to Figure 3.4 for the path traced by the tool for a clockwise arc.

The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when lookingdownward at the plan view of the workpiece.

The G03 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) to pro-vide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.

The G03 command is modal. A programmed G03 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G03 command.

Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.

G04 Dwell(Group 0 G Code)

A dwell command must be programmed with a X, U, or P word to specify the duration of thedwell in seconds. The dwell period can be from .001 to 99999.999 seconds.

The G04 Preparatory Command and its associated X, U, or P word must be programmed to-gether in a data block that does not generate axis motion.

- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when the P word is used to specify thedwell period. The P word specifies dwell in milliseconds. Leading zero suppressionformat must be used.

DWELL IN SECONDS:

A dwell of 2.5 seconds may be programmed in any of the following ways:

G04 X2.5G04 U2.5G04 P2500

The dwell code is non-modal and does not change the status of any modal condition of thecontrol. Following the dwell, the operating mode reverts to the same status as before the dwell.The previous feedrate is reinstated.

G10 Offset Value Setting(Group 0 G Code)

The G10 command permits entering the Work Shift Offset and Tool Offsets with the part pro-gram or as a separate program instead of entering the offset(s) individually from the ManualData Input keyboard.

When offsets are entered as a separate program, this program must be executed prior to partprogram execution to insert the offset values into the offset registers.

As many offsets as needed may be entered from a separate tape. The G10 preparatory com-mand is non-modal and must be programmed in each offset entry block.

Refer to Chapter 4, “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”.

1-10 M-289

Page 25: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G20 Inch Data Input(Group 6 G Code)

Inch mode allows the programmer to program in inch units. The command is modal and canbe canceled only by a G21 (metric mode) command. Pressing the control Reset key has no af-fect on G20. If G20 is active when power is turned OFF, it will be active when power is restored.

- NOTE -It is recommended that all programs written with inch dimensions have the G20code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in casethe previously executed program was in metric mode.

G20 must be programmed in a block by itself.

G21 Metric Data Input(Group 6 G Code)

Metric mode allows the programmer to program in metric units. The command is modal andcan be canceled only by a G20 (inch mode) command. Pressing the control Reset key has noaffect on G21. If G21 is active when power is turned OFF, It will be active when power is re-stored.

- NOTE -It is recommended that all programs written with metric dimensions have the G21code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in casethe previously executed program was in inch mode.

G21 must be programmed in a block by itself.

G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON [Option](Group 9 G Code)

With G22 active, stored stroke limit #2 is active. The tool cannot enter the stroke limits estab-lished by these stored stroke limits.

- NOTE -Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G22 is inactive.

G22 is active at power-up regardless of whether it was active when the power was turnedOFF. However, a control reset will not return the control to G22 if G23 is active when the controlreset is performed.

G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF [Option](Group 9 G Code)

With G23 active, stored stroke limit #2 is inactive. The tool is free to move within the rectan-gular areas established by these limits.

- NOTE -Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G23 is active.

M-289 1-11

Page 26: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead)(Group 1 G Code)

The G32 threadcutting command is used when the programmer wishes to maintain completecontrol over the depth of each cutting pass.

Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread is deter-mined by the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requires pro-gramming one axis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to be pro-grammed.

The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distance be-tween each thread. The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode(G20)

Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III lathe F1.6 F3.4

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathe F1.6 F3.4

Example: The command “G32 W-6. F.05" will result in a linear thread cutting pass 6inches long with a .05 inch lead.

The Feedrate / Rapid Override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is setto 0%. Setting the Feedrate / Rapid Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop Xand Z axis motion. The Feedrate / Rapid Override switch is active during the return pass. TheEmergency Stop push button and control Reset key are active during the threading pass.

The G32 command is modal. A programmed G32 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G32 command.

Refer to Chapter 7 - Threading Cycles.

1-12 M-289

Page 27: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option](Group 1 G Code)

The G34 variable lead threadcutting command is used if thread lead is to increase or de-crease.

Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread is deter-mined by the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requires pro-gramming one axis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to be pro-grammed.

The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distance be-tween each thread.

The K word specifies the rate per revolution at which the lead increases or decreases. A posi-tive (+) K causes an increasing lead and a negative (-) K causes a decreasing lead.

The data word formats are shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode(G20)

Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III latheF1.6 F3.4

K±1.6 K±3.4

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® latheF1.6 F3.4

K±1.6 K±3.4

The Feedrate / Rapid Override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless set to0%. Setting the Feedrate / Rapid Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X andZ axis motion. The Feedrate / Rapid Override switch is active during the return pass. The Emer-gency Stop push button and control Reset key are active during the threading pass.

The G34 command is modal. A programmed G34 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G34 command.

Refer to Chapter 7 - Threading Cycles.

M-289 1-13

Page 28: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation(Group 7 G Code)

Tool Nose radius compensation (G41/G42) is canceled by a programmed G40. If G40 is pro-grammed in a block by itself, tool compensation is canceled. If the G40 block contains an axismove, tool compensation is canceled; then, the programmed move occurs without compensa-tion. TNRC will also be canceled when the Emergency Stop push button or the control Resetkey is pressed.

Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.

G41 TNRC - Workpiece Left of Tool(Group 7 G Code)

Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool is established byprogramming G41. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool mo-tion. If the workpiece is to the left of the operator, the correct code is G41. G41 may be pro-grammed with or without position data in the same data block.

Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.

G42 TNRC - Workpiece Right of Tool(Group 7 G Code)

Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool is established byprogramming G42. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool mo-tion. If the workpiece is to the right of the operator, the correct code is G42. G42 may be pro-grammed with or without position data in the same data block.

Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.

G50 Maximum RPM Limit(Group 0 G Code)

The G50 command is used with Constant Surface Speed (CSS) to establish a spindle rpmlimit. The following example establishes a spindle speed limit of 4000 rpm.

Example: G50 S4000;

A Control OFF cancels a G50 rpm limit.

Refer to Chapter 10 for additional information on Constant Surface Speed (CSS).

G65 Macro Call(Group 0 G Code)

To activate a particular macro and have it executed from the current slide position, programthe following macro call command:

G65 P_____ ;

Where: G65 = Macro Call CommandP = Macro Program Number

The G65 command is non-modal. After the G65 command block is executed, G65 mode isdeactivated.

Refer to Chapter 10 for additional information on the G65 Macro Call command.

1-14 M-289

Page 29: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G70 command is used in conjunction with canned roughing cycles G71, G72, or G73 tospecify the section of the workpiece to be finish contoured. The G70 data block specifies thefirst and last block in the part program controlling the section to be finish contoured. Refer to thefollowing sections for additional information:

G71/G70 Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Turning, Chapter 6G72/G70 Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Facing, Chapter 6G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat, Chapter 6

G71 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G71 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contour-ing of a workpiece with multiple turning passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G71 blocks specify the amount of stock to be re-moved on each roughing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the firstand last block in the part program controlling the rough contouring.

Refer to “G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.

G72 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G72 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contour-ing of a workpiece with multiple facing passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G72 blocks specify the amount of stock to be re-moved on each roughing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the firstand last block in the part program controlling the rough contouring.

Refer to “G72/G70 Rough and Finish Facing Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.

G73 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G73 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contour-ing repeatedly cutting a fixed pattern (contour). This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G73 blocks specify the incremental distance be-tween the first and last roughing pass, the number of roughing passes, and the first and lastblock in the part program controlling the rough contouring.

Refer to “G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.

G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)(Group 0 G Code)

The G74 command activates an automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments.In the G74 block, the programmer specifies the hole depth, size of depth increment, and drillingfeedrate. The G74 command is non-modal, it is effective only in the block in which it is pro-grammed.

Refer to “Constant Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle (G74)”, in Chapter 6, for additional in-formation.

M-289 1-15

Page 30: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G75 command activates an automatic grooving cycle that uses constant depth incre-ments. All information for the G75 Auto grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks. TheG75 command is non-modal; it is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.

Refer to “G75 Auto Grooving Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.

G76 Automatic Threading Cycle(Group 0 G Code)

The G76 Automatic Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to programmultiple threading passes with two blocks of information instead of programming four blocks perthreading pass. The G76 command is non-modal and is canceled when the threading cycle iscompleted. Straight and tapered threads using plunge or compound infeed can be programmed.

The Feedrate / Rapid override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is setto 0%. Setting the Feedrate / Rapid override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop Xand Z axis motion. The Feedrate / Rapid override switch is active during the return pass. TheEmergency Stop push button and control Reset key are active during the threading pass.

The Feed Hold push button is not active during the threading pass.

Refer to “Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76)”, in Chapter 7, for additional information.

G90 Canned Turning Cycle(Group 1 G Code)

The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multi-ple turning passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G90 block.Straight or tapered turn operations may be performed. The G90 command is modal. A pro-grammed G90 command will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 Gcode will cancel an active G90 command. G90 can also be canceled by a control OFF or controlReset. The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons, Feedrate / Rapid Override switch, andFeed Hold push button are active.

Refer to “Canned Turning Cycle (G90)”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.

G92 Canned Threading Cycle(Group 1 G Code)

The G92 Canned Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to programmultiple threading passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G92block. Straight or tapered threads may be cut in this mode. Compound infeeding is not possiblein this mode. The G92 command is modal. A programmed G92 command will cancel any cur-rently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G92 command.G92 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset. The Feed Hold push button is not activeduring the threading pass, but is active during the return pass.

The Feedrate / Rapid override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is setto 0%. Setting the Feedrate / Rapid override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop Xand Z axis motion. The Feedrate / Rapid override switch is active during the return pass. TheEmergency Stop push button and control Reset key are active during the threading pass.

Refer to “G92 Programming”, in Chapter 7, for additional information.

1-16 M-289

Page 31: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G94 Canned Facing Cycle(Group 1 G Code)

The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multi-ple facing passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G94 block.Straight or tapered facing operations may be performed. The G94 command is modal. A pro-grammed G94 command will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 Gcode will cancel an active G94 command. G94 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset.The Feedrate / Rapid Override switch and Feed Hold push button are active.

Refer to “Canned Facing Cycle (G94)”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.

G96 Constant Surface Speed (CSS)(Group 2 G Code)

The G96 mode allows programming the speed of the workpiece with respect to the tool pointdirectly in surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in metricmode (G21). CSS is a function of the spindle speed range and the programmed constant sur-face speed (S word). The control automatically adjusts the spindle speed within its range tomaintain the constant surface speed as the cutting radius varies. Refer to “G50 Spindle Limita-tion” for limiting spindle rpm while using G96 programming. G96 is canceled by G97. If a newspindle speed is not programmed, the spindle will remain at the speed that was active whenCSS was canceled.

Refer to “Constant Surface Speed”, in Chapter 10, for more information.

G97 Direct RPM Programming (CSS Cancel)(Group 2 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. G97 allows the programmer to program spindle speeds di-rectly in revolutions per minute. When G97 cancels G96, the spindle speed in rpm equals thespeed at which the spindle was turning when CSS was canceled. If a different spindle speed isdesired, an S word specifying the new spindle speed should be programmed in the same blockas the G97 command. The S word format for direct rpm programming is S4.0

G98 Inches/Millimeter per Minute Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)

The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly in inches/mm per minute. The feedrate remainsunchanged until reprogrammed. The F word format is F3.2 in inch mode (G20) and F5.0 in met-ric mode (G21). When entering G98 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G98 ismodal and cancels G99. The decimal point must be programmed. The following examples arewritten for inch mode (G20):

Example 1: F400 results in a feedrate of 4.00 inches per minute.

Example 2: F400. results in a feedrate of 400.00 inches per minute.

G99 Inches/Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly ininches/mm per revolution. The feedrate remains unchanged until reprogrammed. The F word for-mat is F1.6 in inch mode (G20) and F3.4 in metric mode (G21). The maximum programmablefeedrates are 9.999999 inches/revolution and 500.0000 millimeters/revolution. When enteringG99 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G99 is modal and cancels G98.

M-289 1-17

Page 32: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

X WORD

- CAUTION -Programming an X axis move without the correct Tool or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the spindle or workpiece.

The X word is a DIAMETER DIMENSION for the cross slide. It is measured relative to thespindle centerline and is written with an X followed by a plus or minus sign. The plus sign maybe omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed. The X command es-tablishes the absolute position of the turret top plate reference location in relation to the spindlecenterline after movement has been completed.

Refer to the Appendix for turret travel specifications.

Only one X command is permitted in a data block. If more than one X command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the X command pro-grammed closest to the End of Block character.

The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode(G20)

Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III lathe X±2.4 X±3.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathe X±2.5 X±3.4

Assuming tool offsets are inactive, X is positive when the turret reference point is pro-grammed to move to a position in front of the spindle centerline. X is negative when the turretreference point is programmed to move to a position behind the spindle centerline. X axis pro-gramming resolution is discussed under “Diameter Programming”, page 1-30.

With no tool offset active and no workshift (zero offset) active, all programmed motions will bethe final position of the turret reference point in relation to the spindle centerline. The positionwill be displayed as a diameter whose center is on the spindle centerline. When X axis tool off-sets are activated by an offset command (T word), the programmed position will be modified ac-cording to the offset.

Example: A command of X2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide with the tur-ret reference point 1.25 inches in front of the spindle centerline.

A workshift (zero offset) can be used to establish a work coordinate system in which X0 doesnot coincide with the spindle centerline. If X0 for the work coordinate system used is not on thespindle centerline, all programmed motions will be relative to the X0 established by theworkshift. A movement in the +X direction will cause the X axis to be positioned one-half theprogrammed distance in front of the zero point. A movement in the -X direction will cause the Xaxis to be positioned one-half the programmed distance behind the zero point. Refer to Chapter4 for information regarding the work shift.

The X word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). The X word for-mat in a G04 command is 4.4, in seconds. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.

1-18 M-289

Page 33: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

U WORD

- CAUTION -Programming a U axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the spindle or workpiece.

The U command establishes the incremental move of the cross slide position in relation to thecurrent cross slide location.

Only one U command is permitted in a data block. If more than one U command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the U command pro-grammed closest to the End of Block character.

The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode(G20)

Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III lathe U±1.4 U±3.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathe U±1.5 U±3.4

U is positive when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the front of the machine. Uis negative when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the back of the machine.

Example: A command of U2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide 1.25 inchesin the +X direction from the previous position on the X axis.

The U word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). The U word for-mat in a G04 command is 4.4, in seconds. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.

M-289 1-19

Page 34: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Z WORD

- CAUTION -Programming a Z axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the spindle or workpiece.

The Z word is a distance command for the carriage. It is measured relative to the spindle faceand is written with a Z followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus sign may be omitted be-cause the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.

Refer to the Appendix for turret travel specifications.

Only one Z command is permitted in a data block. If more than one Z command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the Z command pro-grammed closest to the End of Block character.

The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode(G20)

Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III lathe Z±2.4 Z±3.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathe Z±2.5 Z±3.4

Assuming tool offsets are inactive, Z is positive when the turret reference point is pro-grammed to the right of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System. Z is negative when theturret reference point is programmed to the left of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System.

With no tool offset active and no workshift (zero offset) active, all programmed Z axis move-ments will be the final position of the turret face in relation to the spindle face. Since all carriagemovement must take place to the right of the headstock, all movements regardless of directionwill be plus (+). When a tool offset and/or a zero offset are active, the programmed position willbe modified accordingly.

Example: A command of “Z5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the car-riage with the turret face 5 inches from the spindle face. A command of “Z9.”with a feedrate will cause the control to position the carriage with the turret face9 inches from the spindle face.

A workshift (zero offset) is used to establish a work coordinate system in that Z0 does not co-incide with the spindle face. If Z0 for the work coordinate system used is not the spindle face, allprogrammed Z axis movements will be relative to the Z0 established by the workshift. A positiveZ value describes a coordinate point to the right of the Z0 point. A negative Z value describes acoordinate point to the left of the Z0 point.

1-20 M-289

Page 35: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

W WORD

- CAUTION -Programming a W axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the spindle or workpiece.

The W command establishes the incremental move of the carriage in relation to the currentcarriage location.

Only one W command is permitted in a data block. If more than one W command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the W command pro-grammed closest to the End of Block character.

The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode(G20)

Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III lathe W±2.4 W±3.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathe W±2.5 W±3.4

W is positive when the carriage is programmed to move away from the spindle face. W isnegative when the carriage is programmed to move toward the spindle face.

Example: A command of “W5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the car-riage 5 inches in the +Z direction from the previous position on the Z axis. Acommand of “W-5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the carriage5 inches in the -Z direction from the previous position on the Z axis.

B WORD

The B word is a spindle orient command. The spindle is stopped in relation to the spindle 0(zero) degree mark. For more information, refer to Chapter 10 - Miscellaneous.

I WORD

The I word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The I word is a signed value de-fining the distance on the X axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a re-sult of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center.

The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode(G20)

Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC III lathe I±3.4 I±4.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision lathe I±3.5 I±4.4

Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.

M-289 1-21

Page 36: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

K WORD

The K word is used during Circular Interpolation and Variable Lead Threadcutting.

Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)The K word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The K word is a signed value de-

fining the distance on the Z axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a re-sult of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center.

The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode (G20) Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III lathe K±3.4 K±4.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathe K±3.5 K±4.4

Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.

Variable Lead Threading (G34) [Option]The K word specifies the change in thread lead per spindle revolution. The value is positive

for an increasing lead and negative for a decreasing lead.

The word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode (G20) Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC III lathe K±1.5 K±3.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision lathe K±1.6 K±3.4

Refer to “Variable Lead Threadcutting”, in Chapter 7.

R WORD

Linear Interpolation (G01)When Linear Interpolation (G01) is active, “,R” defines the numerical values of a corner radius

between any linear (G01) moves. The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode (G20) Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC III lathe ,R2.4 ,R3.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision lathe ,R2.5 ,R3.4

Refer to “Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius”, in Chapter 3.

1-22 M-289

Page 37: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)When Circular Interpolation (G02 or G03) is active, R defines the numerical value of a radius

connecting two points. The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode (G20) Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC® III lathe R2.4 R3.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathe R2.5 R3.4

Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.

Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42)When Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41 or G42) is active, R defines the numerical value

of the tool nose radius. Values are stored in the Tool Offset Tables and are activated by a Tcommand. The data word format is shown in the following table:

MachineModel

Data Word Formats

Inch Mode (G20) Metric Mode(G21)

CHNC III lathe R1.4 R2.3

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision lathe R1.5 R2.4

Refer to “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”, in Chapter 2.

Defining TapersWhen used with the following cycles, the R word defines the amount of taper when a tapered

turning, threading, or facing cycle is executed:

Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76), Chapter 7Canned Turning Cycle (G90), Chapter 6G92 Programming, Chapter 7Canned Facing Cycle (G94), Chapter 6

M-289 1-23

Page 38: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

P WORD

The P word is used in the following functions:

Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle (G71), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle (G72), Chapter 6Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73), Chapter 6Subprogram Calling, Chapter 10Program Entry of Tool Offsets, Chapter 4

The P word may also be used to establish a time factor for a G04 Dwell. The P word has thedata word format P8 when used to specify dwell. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.

When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the P word specifies the sequence number ofthe first block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured.When used with the G70 cycle, the P word specifies the sequence number of the first block inthe program section that controls the workpiece area being finish contoured. The data word for-mat is P4. Leading zeros may be omitted.

- NOTE -Decimal Point programming cannot be used with the P word. Leading zero sup-pression must be used.

When used with subprogram calling, the P word appears in the M98 calling block of the mainpart program and specifies the program I.D. number of the subprogram to be called. The dataword format is P4. Leading zeros may be omitted.

When used with program entry of tool offsets or Workshift offsets, the P word specifies theoffset number and has the following numerical ranges:

P00 when used with Workshift OffsetP01 to P32 when used with tool wear offsetsP10001 to P10032 when used with tool geometry offsets

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool offsets in memory.

Q WORD

The Q word is used in the following functions:

Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle (G71), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle (G72), Chapter 6Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73), Chapter 6Program Entry of Tool Offsets, Chapter 4

When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the Q word specifies the Sequence Numberof the last block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured.When used with the G70 cycle, the Q word specifies the sequence number of the last block inthe program section that controls the workpiece area being finish contoured. The data word for-mat is Q4. Leading zeros may be omitted.

When tool geometry offsets are entered with a program, the Q word specifies the tool tip ori-entation number. The data word format is Q1, with numerical values ranging from 0 to 9. Referto “Tool Offsets”, in Chapter 4.

1-24 M-289

Page 39: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

F WORD

The F word is used to establish a feedrate. When used with the G98 command, it expressesthe feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute. The word format is F3.2 for inch mode (G20)and F5.0 for metric mode (G21). The decimal point must be programmed.

When used with the G99 command, it expresses the feedrate in inches or millimeters per rev-olution. The word format is F1.6 for inch mode (G20) and F3.4 for metric mode (G21). The deci-mal point must be programmed. If more than one feedrate is programmed in a data block, thelast feedrate programmed will be the active feedrate.

Due to the maximum feedrates on the X and Z axes, the feedrate in G99 mode is “LeadLimited”. When G99 mode is active, the maximum feedrate in G01 mode is derived from the fol-lowing formulas:

Maximum Feedrate (in/min) = inches per minute ÷ rev/minMaximum Feedrate (mm/min) = mm per minute ÷ rev/min

The maximum programmable feedrate is 400 inches per minute [10160 millimeters per min-ute] on the X and Z axis.

The F word, which can be placed anywhere in the data block, remains unchanged until repro-grammed. If G00 is used to obtain the rapid traverse rate, be sure it is canceled by anotherGroup 1 G code after the rapid traverse move is completed.

The % Feedrate / % Rapid Override switch modifies the programmed feedrate from 0% (FeedHold) to 150%. When DRY RUN mode is active, the control causes all slide motion to take placeat 35 inches per minute [900 millimeters per minute] when the % Feedrate / % Rapid Overrideswitch is set to 100%.

S WORD

The S word has several functions, depending on the G code it is associated with:

CODE FUNCTION:

G50 S word selects the spindle rpm limit for CSSG96 S word specifies surface feet/meters per minute in CSSG97 S word selects direct spindle rpm

When used with G50, the S word specifies the maximum rpm the spindle can attain duringConstant Surface Speed programming (G96).

In G96 Constant Surface Speed programming, the format is S4 in both inch and metricmodes. The units are surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minutein metric mode (G21). Refer to “Constant Surface Speed”, in Chapter 10.

When used in G97 direct rpm mode, the word format is S4. Maximum spindle speeds arelisted in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-3. The S word is modal and, once programmed, neednot be programmed again until a different spindle speed is required.

Do not program a decimal point with the S word.

M-289 1-25

Page 40: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

T WORD

- NOTE -The standard turret top plate has eight stations, designated 1 through 8. The op-tional gang tool turret top plate has four stations, designated 2, 4, 6, and 8.

The T word selects the turret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position and activatesthe Tool Offset number. The Tool Offset number selects the following:

Tool Geometry Offset File:

1. X and Z axis Tool Dimensions.2. Tool Nose Radius Value.3. Tool Orientation Number.

Tool Wear Offset File:

1. X and Z axis Tool Wear adjustments.The T word has the word format T4. The first two digits specify the turret station and the last

two digits specify the location of the tool offsets. Note that both the geometry and wear offsetsare activated by the last two digits.

Example: N0120 G04 T0515;

Block N0120 calls for turret station 5. Tool geometry offsets on line 15 of the Tool Offset Ge-ometry File will be activated and tool wear offsets on line 15 of the Tool Wear File will also beactivated.

- CAUTION -If no tool offsets are to be activated, the last two digits MUST be 00. If no digitsare programmed in the last two places, the turret will not index. Instead, the con-trol will use the turret station number as an offset and activate that offset. Thiscould result in a collision as the control will attempt to position the previouslyactive tool using incorrect offsets or no offsets at all.

For example, if the turret is to be indexed to station 5 without an offset, T0500 must be pro-grammed. If T05 is programmed, the turret will not be indexed to station 5, but offset 05 will beactivated.

A turret command of “T0" should be inserted before indexing to a new turret station and atthe end of each operation to cause the active tool offsets to be cleared from the offset registers.

- NOTE -When the Hardinge Safe-Start formats are used, it is not necessary to program“T0" before indexing to a new turret station. ”T0" is included in the Safe-Startsubprograms. Refer to Chapter 10 for information on Safe Start subprograms.

1-26 M-289

Page 41: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M WORD

The M words convey action to the machine. They are known as miscellaneous functions andare designated by a programmed M word having the format M2.

Only one M code is allowed in a data block. If more than one M code is programmed in adata block, the last M code entered will be the active M code. Refer also to the M code chart inthe Appendix.

The M code may be placed anywhere in the data block.

The following M codes have been assigned to Hardinge CHNC® III and CHNC IIISPSuper-Precision® lathes:

M00 Program StopThe M00 command stops the program, stops the spindle, and turns the coolant off. The Col-

let/Chuck push button is enabled. This function can be used for gauging and end-for-ending theworkpiece. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program to continue. It is the programmer’s respon-sibility to program an M03, M04, M08, M13, or M14 to restart the spindle and/or coolant pumpwhen restarting the program after an M00 Program Stop.

M01 Optional StopThe M01 command performs the same function as M00, if the Option Stop push button on the

control panel has been activated before the block containing the M01 is read by the control. Ifthe Option Stop push button has not been activated by the operator, the control will ignore theprogrammed M01 and will continue to execute the program. This function is useful when it isnecessary to gauge the workpiece during setup. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program tocontinue. It is the programmer’s responsibility to program an M03, M04, M08, M13, or M14 to re-start the spindle and/or coolant pump when restarting the program after an M01 Optional Stop.

M02 End of ProgramM02 indicates the end of a part program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It

stops the spindle and turns the coolant off. The Collet Open and Collet Close push buttons areenabled. Refer also to M30.

M03 Spindle ForwardThe M03 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwiseas viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M03 remains active until canceled by M00,M01, M02, M04, M05, M14, M30, or by pressing the Emergency Stop push button or the controlReset key.

M04 Spindle ReverseThe M04 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counter-clockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M04 remains active until canceledby M00, M01, M02, M03, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing the Emergency Stop push button orcontrol Reset key.

M05 Spindle Stop/Coolant OFFThe M05 command causes the spindle to stop and turns the coolant off, but DOES NOT stop

axis motion unless G99 is active. M05 remains active until canceled by M03, M04, M13, or M14.M05 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02, M30, Emer-gency Stop, or control Reset.

M-289 1-27

Page 42: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M08 Coolant ONM08 turns the coolant pump ON and remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M05,

M09, M30, Emergency Stop, or control Reset.

M09 Coolant OFFM09 turns the coolant pump OFF and remains active until canceled by M08, M13, or M14.

M09 is active at machine start-up and is activated by M00, M01, M02, M05, M30, EmergencyStop, or control Reset.

M13 Spindle Forward/Coolant ONThe M13 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. The spindle is running in the forward di-rection when rotating clockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M13 remainsactive until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M04, M05, M14, M30, or by pressing the EmergencyStop push button or the control Reset key.

If M04 is programmed after M13, the spindle will run in the reverse direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.

M14 Spindle Reverse/Coolant ONThe M14 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. The spindle is running in the reverse di-rection when rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M14remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M04, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing theEmergency Stop push button or control Reset key.

If M03 is programmed after M14, the spindle will run in the forward direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.

M21 Open ColletThe M21 command causes the collet closer to open. M21 remains active until canceled by

M22.

M22 Close ColletThe M22 command causes the collet closer to close. M22 remains active until canceled by

M21.

M23 Vertical Slide IN [Option]The M23 command causes the verical slide to advance toward the spindle centerline.

M24 Vertical Slide and Part Chute IN [Option]The M25 command causes the vertical slide and/or parts chute to advance toward the spindle

centerline.

M25 Vertical Slide and/or Parts Chute Retract [Option]The M25 command causes the vertical slide and/or parts chute to retract away from the spin-

dle centerline.

M26 Parts Chute IN [Option]The M26 command causes the parts chute to advance toward the spindle centerline.

1-28 M-289

Page 43: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M28 External Chucking ModeM28 commands the control to use the main spindle collet closer with external-gripping style

work-holding devices. The position of the main spindle collet closer is checked on power-up andthe closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the main spindle collet closer is open atpower-up, it will remain open.

Refer to the CHNC® III lathe operator’s manual (M-290) for information on establishing chuck-ing modes.

M29 Internal Chucking ModeM29 commands the control to use the main spindle collet closer with internal-gripping style

work-holding devices. The position of the main spindle collet closer is checked on power-up andthe closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the main spindle collet closer is open atpower-up, it will remain open.

Refer to the CHNC III lathe operator’s manual (M-290) for information on establishing chuck-ing modes.

M30 End of ProgramM30 indicates the end of a program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It

stops the spindle, turns the coolant off, and rewinds the program to its beginning. The ColletOpen and Collet Close push buttons are enabled. Refer also to M02.

M31 Program Rewind and RestartThe M31 command causes the program to be restarted automatically, when followed by an

M30 command.

M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle OverrideM48 is the Power-up or Reset state of the control. It enables the use of the feedrate and

spindle override features. M48 remains active until canceled by M49.

M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle OverrideM49 cancels M48 and causes the feedrates and spindle speeds to operate at 100% of the

programmed values, ignoring the feedrate and spindle override controls. M49 remains active un-til canceled by an M02, M30, M48, a control OFF, or a control Reset.

M98 Subprogram CallThis code must be in the main part program block which activates a subprogram. It is pro-

grammed with a P word, which specifies the subprogram number. Refer to “Subprograms”, inChapter 10.

M99 Subprogram EndThis code is used to return to the main part program after a subprogram has been completed.

Refer to “Subprograms”, in Chapter 10.

M-289 1-29

Page 44: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DIAMETER PROGRAMMINGHardinge CHNC® III and CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® lathes are designed to allow the pro-

grammer to use part diameter dimensions from the workpiece drawing as X word entries. Withdiameter programming, the workpiece centerline coincides with the spindle centerline unless anX axis Work Shift (Zero Offset) is active. Refer to Chapter 4, “Work Shift and Tool Offsets” forinformation on Work Shift.

- CAUTION -It is strongly recommended that the X axis register in the Work Shift file be set tozero at all times.

PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. X words are programmed as diameters.

2. Data word formats for diameter programming:

CHNC III lathe

X ±1.4 in inch mode (G20) and X ±3.3 in metric mode (G21). Maximum resolution is.00005 inches [.0005mm] on the diameter.

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision lathe

X ±1.5 in inch mode (G20) and X ±3.4 in metric mode (G21). Maximum resolution is.000005 inches [.00005mm] on the diameter.

3. Dwell (G04) is not affected by diameter programming and is entered directly in seconds ormilliseconds, depending on the data word used.

4. Incremental or continuous jogs are unaffected by diameter programming. The actual movesare incremental, but the final absolute X position will be displayed on the control displayscreen as an X diameter.

5. Tool geometry offsets in the X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Tool wear off-sets in the X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Z moves are not affected.

6. X axis “Distance to Go” is displayed as a diameter value.

1-30 M-289

Page 45: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

GENERAL PROGRAM FORMAT

BEGINNING OF PROGRAM

% Stop Code (End of Record)O_________ Letter “O” and the Program NumberG65 P9150 H_____ Collet DwellG20 or G21 Inch or Metric Mode

BEGINNING OF OPERATION

N _____ (___________) Sequence Search Number and MessageG97 S1000 M13 (or) M14 1000 RPM and Spindle DirectionM98 P1 Call: Safe Start SubprogramT_____ Index to Tool Station and Call OffsetX _____ Z_____ Move Tool To Activate Tool Offset

IF USING C.S.S.G50 S ______ Maximum RPM LimitG96 S ______ Surface Feet (Meters) Per Minute Speed

IF USING T.N.R.C.G1 G41 (or) G42 X ____ Z ____ F100. Tool Nose Radius Compensation,

Non-Cutting Move Required, IPM Feedrate

G1 G99 X ____ Z ____ F ____ Machine Part, Inches [mm] Per RevolutionFeed

X ____ (and/or) Z ____ Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool TipDiameter

M98 P1 (or) M98 P2 Call: Safe O.D. or I.D. End SubprogramM01 Operation Stop

PROGRAM ENDINGM30 Program Stop - Rewind% Stop Code (End of Record)

BAR JOBUse the Repeat Mode push button on the Operator Panel

M-289 1-31Revised: October, 1994

Page 46: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

1-32 M-289

Page 47: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

INTRODUCTIONRegardless of the location of the origin of the work coordinate system used, execution of the

part program causes a single point (tool nose reference point) to be moved relative to and posi-tioned at coordinates specified by the program. However, the tool nose is not a point, it is a ra-dius. Stock removal does not always take place at the same section of the tool nose. Orientationof the tool nose relative to the work surface determines which portion of the tool is involved instock removal. (Orientation depends on tool geometry and the type of cut.) Programming theproper tool path for radius and angle contouring requires Tool Nose Radius Compensation. Thefollowing example illustrates the need for such compensation.

To machine the 30 degree taper shown in Figure 2.3, a contouring tool with a tool nose simi-lar to the one in Figure 2.1 is used. The distance this tool nose extends from the cross slide ref-erence point is measured from the cross slide reference point to the X axis touch-off point. Theposition of the tool nose relative to the cross slide face is measured from the cross slide face tothe Z axis touch-off point. If a Tool Offset is active while a part program is being executed, the“Actual Position” register will display the coordinates of the tool nose reference point. This pointis formed by the X coordinate of the X axis touch-off point and the Z coordinate of the Z axistouch-off point. In this case, the tool nose reference point is not on the tool nose, as shown inFigure 2.1 .

However, this is not always the case. Some tools have only one touch-off point, as shown inFigure 2.2 . In such a case, the distance the nose extends from the cross slide reference pointand the cross slide face to this single touch-off point becomes the tool nose reference point. Forsuch tools, the tool nose reference point is located on the tool nose. Some numerical controlmanuals refer to the tool nose reference point as the “imaginary tool tip”. This term can be mis-leading and is avoided in this manual.

M-289 2-1

Figure 2.1 - X and Z-Axis ToolTouch-Off Points

TI1551

TOOL NOSEREFERENCE

POINT

Z-AXISTOUCH-OFF

POINT

X-AXISTOUCH-OFF

POINT

+Z

+X

Figure 2.2 - X-Axis ToolTouch-Off Points

TI1552

X-AXISTOUCH-OFF

POINT

+X

+Z

Page 48: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

To properly machine the section of the part shown in Figure 2.3, stock removal must takeplace along the line connecting X.4 Z0. and X.8 Z-.3464 . However, if Tool Nose Radius Com-pensation is ignored and these coordinates are programmed, the resulting cut will be oversize.Block N50 (Refer to Figure 2.3) moves the tool nose reference point from X.4 Z.2 to X.4 Z0. andblock N60 moves the reference point from X.4 Z0. to X.8 Z-.3464 . Stock removal does not takeplace along the path followed by the tool nose reference point (represented by the dashed line)and the resulting cut (represented by the solid line) is oversize. The amount oversize is a func-tion of the angle of the taper and the size of the tool nose radius.

Without automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation (TNRC) to make the control generate theproper tool path, the programmer must perform the necessary calculations to offset the effect ofthe tool nose radius.

As with tapers, any change in the tool nose radius will require program revisions for all con-touring involving arcs.

With automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation (TNRC), the programmer can write a partprogram as if a zero radius tool were being used. Programs are written using coordinates takendirectly from the workpiece. The operator stores the radius value of each tool in the Tool Offsetfiles and the control makes all necessary calculations and compensations as the program is exe-cuted. If a tool is changed, the operator simply modifies the radius in the Tool Offset file and thecontrol recalculates the compensation as the program is executed again. Time consuming man-ual calculations are eliminated, as is the threat of large scale part program revisions due to tool-ing changes.

TOOL ORIENTATION NUMBERBefore TNRC can be activated in a program, the tool nose radius value and the tool orienta-

tion number must be stored in the tool offset file. The tool orientation number describes the cen-ter of the tool nose radius relative to the X and Z touch-off points. A diagram of the orientationcodes appears in Figure 2.4 . A diagram showing the proper signs for tool geometry offsets ap-pears in Figure 2.5 .

Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool nose radius values and tool orientation num-bers in the tool offset file.

2-2 M-289

Figure 2.3 - Example of Oversize Cut Caused byAbsense of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (TNRC)

TI1553

X.4 Z0.

X.8 Z-.5X.8 Z-.3464

START POINTX.4 Z.2

.3464

.230°

30°N40 G01 G99 F.005 ;

N50 Z0. ;

N60 X.8 Z-.3464 ;

N70 Z-.5 ;

NOTE: ALL X VALUES ARE DIAMETERS

CL

Page 49: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TO ACTIVATE TNRCA tool nose radius value and tool orientation number must be activated before entering TNRC

mode. Tool nose radius values and tool orientation codes are activated along with Tool Offsetsby a programmed T word with the data word format T4: Txxyy

Where: xx = Turret Station Numberyy = Tool Offset Number

A programmed T0 command deactivates all active tool offset data.

- CAUTION -Due to the way in which Tool Nose Radius Compensation is interpolated, G41 orG42 should be programmed in a block with non-cutting linear motion. If TNRC isactivated in a block in which cutting is commanded, undesirable axis motionmay occur.

A G41 or G42 Preparatory Command is programmed to activate Tool Nose Radius Compen-sation. This block is called the TNRC entry block. The G41 or G42 entry block must be anon-cutting linear move by both axes, with one of the axis moves equal to or greater than theradius of the tool nose.

The tool nose radius value and tool orientation number for the active tool will be used for thecompensation. If the tool nose radius value and tool orientation number are not present in thetool offset file, the tool nose radius and tool orientation number will be assumed to be zero bythe control when TNRC is activated.

To determine which G code to use, imagine you are sitting on the tool nose facing the direc-tion of tool motion. If the workpiece is on your left, G41 is the correct code. If the workpiece ison your right, G42 is the correct code. Refer to Figure 2.6 .

The GE Fanuc 18T control has a two block look-ahead capability, which enables the controlto complete a compensated move with the tool in position to begin the next compensated move.While the currently active block is being executed, the control searches ahead to read and pro-cess the next two data blocks. Refer to Figure 2.7 for a comparison of programmed tool pathswith and without TNRC, based on similar workpiece contours.

M-289 2-3

Figure 2.4 - Tool Nose Radius OrientationCodes

TI1557

6

8

5 7

21

34

Spindle Turret+X

+Z

0 or 9

-X

+Z

Figure 2.5 - Tool Dimension Signs

TI1558

+X +Z

-X +Z

Spindle Face

+X -Z

-X -Z

Page 50: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

2-4 M-289

Figure 2.6 - G41/G42 Diagram

TI1559

G41+X

+Z

-X

BORE IN

BORE OUT

G42

+Z

CL

CL

CL

CL

+X

+Z

Figure 2.7 - Tool Path Comparisons

NO TNRC ACTIVE TNRC ACTIVE

TNRC

TNRC

TNRC

TNRC

CL

TI1729

CL

CL CL

Page 51: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ENTERING AND EXITING THE WORKPIECE WITH TNRC ACTIVEWhen TNRC is active, the control will interpret the entire 360° diameter formed by the center

of the tool tip and the tool tip radius as usable tool tip for machining.

When entering and exiting the workpiece, axis motion must be perpendicular to the part sur-face. Refer to Figure 2.8 for an illustration of correct axis motion.

If axis motion is not perpendicular to the part surface, the tool may be “boxed in”. When a toolis “boxed in”, it will not reach the programmed end point. Refer to Figure 2.9 for an illustration ofincorrect axis motion and “boxing the tool in”.

M-289 2-5

Figure 2.8 - Correct Axis Motion

EntryMove

ExitMove

+X

+Z

G42

G42

TI1730

CL

Figure 2.9 - Incorrect Axis Motion

TI1731

EntryMove

G42

+Z

+X

G42

ExitMove

CL

Page 52: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TO SWITCH G41/G42 CODE WITH TNRC ACTIVETo switch from G41 to G42 or vice versa while TNRC is active, it is not necessary to program

a G40 to cancel the active TNRC code. Programming the desired TNRC code (G41 or G42) witha linear move will cancel the active code and activate the new G code. For example, if G41 isactive and G42 is programmed, G41 will be canceled and G42 will be activated.

Due to the way TNRC is interpolated, this linear move should usually be a non-cutting move.The notable exception is an axis reversal. Axis reversal is discussed in the next section.

AXIS REVERSALS WITH TNRC ACTIVEAxis reversals are possible with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active. As mentioned in the

previous section, an axis reversal represents a case when a G41/G42 switch can occur in a cut-ting move.

In the sample program shown inFigure 2.10, G41 is activated in themove to intermediate point “A” (BlockN50).

Block N60 establishes thefeedrate and moves the tool nosereference point to point “B” for thefacing operation.

Block N70 commands the facingmove from point “B” to point “C”. Theposition of the center of the tool noseradius at the end of block N70 is onthe spindle centerline. Therefore, atthe end of block N70 the tool nosereference point is one radius to the-X side of the spindle centerline.

Block N80 switches the TNRCcode to G42 and moves the toolback up the face of the part to point“D”. No Z axis motion takes place asa result of the G41/G42 switch.

Blocks N90 and N100 finish con-touring the part with G42 active.

In summary, axis reversals arepossible, but be aware of the toolnose radius “overshoot” at the end ofthe move prior to the reversal.

2-6 M-289

Figure 2.10 - Axis Reversal with TNRC Active

TI1732

N50 G00 G41 X1.2 Z.1 ;N60 G01 G99 Z0. F.01 ;N70 X-.02 ;N80 G42 X.8 ;N90 X1. Z-.1 ;N100 Z-.5 ;

A(X1.2 Z.1)

TNRC Entry Block

B(X1.2 Z0.)

D(X.8 Z0.)

X.1 Z-.1

R=.01

Lines 50, 60, & 70TNRC ActiveG41 (Part Left)

Lines 80, 90, & 100TNRC ActiveG42 (Part Right)

X.1 Z-.1

D(X.8 Z0.)

C(X-.02 Z0.)

C(X-.02 Z0.)

CL

CL

Page 53: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

MODES IN WHICH TNRC IS NOT PERFORMEDTool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following cycles:

G32 Constant Lead Threadcutting Cycle

G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting Cycle [Option]

G71 Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle

G72 Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle

G73 Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle

G74 Auto Drilling Cycle

G75 Auto Grooving Cycle

G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle

G92 Canned Threading Cycle

- NOTE -If TNRC is active before a G71, G72, or G73 cycle is executed, TNRC is deacti-vated during the cycle and then reactivated after the cycle is completed.

MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES WITH TNRC ACTIVETool Nose Radius Compensation is not active during G71, G72, or G73 automatic roughing

cycles, but is active during the G70 Multiple Repetitive Finishing Cycle. To use TNRC in the G70Multiple Repetitive Finishing Cycle, TNRC must be activated in the move to the start point. If thesame tool is used to rough and finish the workpiece, the move to the start point occurs prior tothe roughing cycle.

Compensation will be suppressed until the finishing cycle is executed. If a different tool isused to finish turn the workpiece, compensation is activated in the move to the start point priorto the G70 cycle.

M-289 2-7

Page 54: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CANNED TURNING AND FACING CYCLES WITH TNRC ACTIVETool Nose Radius Compensation can be used with the G90 Canned Turning Cycle and the

G94 Canned Facing Cycle, but it must be activated prior to the block that specifies the G90 orG94 canned cycle. If TNRC is used in either cycle, axis motion is as follows:

G90 CANNED TURNING CYCLE (Figure 2.11)

1. The tool moves from the start point to the compensated position to begin the turn.

2. The tool ends the turn at the compensated position to begin facing the shoulder.

3. At the end of the facing move, the tool nose reference point is at the X coordinate of thestart point.

4. The tool then returns to the start point. At the end of the move, the tool nose referencepoint is at the coordinates of the start point.

G94 CANNED FACING CYCLE (Figure 2.12)

1. The tool moves from the start point to the compensated position to begin the turn.

2. The tool ends the face at the compensated position to begin the turn.

3. At the end of the turn, the tool nose reference point is at the Z coordinate of the start point.

4. The tool then returns to the start point. At the end of the move, the tool nose referencepoint is at the coordinates of the start point.

2-8 M-289

Figure 2.11 - Axis Motion During a G90Cycle with TNRC

TI1574

StartPoint

FeedRapid Traverse

Figure 2.12 - Axis Motion During a G94Cycle with TNRC

TI1575

StartPoint

FeedRapid Traverse

Page 55: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TOOL MOVED AWAY FROM THE WORKPIECE WITH TNRC ACTIVEIf a program is stopped during the execution of contouring with TNRC active and the tool is

moved away from the workpiece, either by a manual JOG operation or an MDI command, do notresume the cycle from this new position. With TNRC still active, position the tool at the end ofthe last executed block or, if the program has been reset, perform a Program Restart operation.

TNRC RELATED ALARMSALARM 033

An intersecting point cannot be determined for TNRC.

ALARM 034

TNRC entry or exit move is programmed in G02 or G03 mode. The control must be inG00 or G01 mode to activate or deactivate TNRC.

ALARM 038

Arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. The probable cause of the alarmis a G02/G03 programming error. Possibly a G01 move was not programmed after cuttingan arc.

ALARM 039

An Insert Chamfer (,C) or Insert Radius (,R) was commanded in a TNRC entry block,TNRC exit block, or in a switch between G41 and G42. The program may cause overcuttingto occur.

ALARM 040

Overcutting will occur with TNRC active and a G90 or G94 canned cycle programmed inthe same data block.

ALARM 041

Overcutting will occur because of one of the following conditions:

1. A programmed groove or inside corner is smaller than the tool nose radius.

2. The direction of the tool nose reference point is between 90 degrees and 270 degrees dif-ferent than the programmed path.

TO CANCEL TNRCTo cancel TNRC, program a G40 along with a non-cutting linear move in both axes. As with

TNRC activation, it is important that the motion in this block be non-cutting due to the wayTNRC is interpolated. Alarm “034 PROGRAM” will appear if circular motion is programmed inthe exit block. Alarm “039 PROGRAM” will appear if an Insert Chamfer or Insert Radius is pro-grammed in the TNRC exit block.

M-289 2-9

Page 56: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TNRC PROGRAMMING RULES1. Store tool nose radius values and orientation codes along with the tool offset data in the

Tool Offset file. The offset must be activated prior to activation of TNRC.

2. To activate TNRC, program a G41 or G42 along with non-cutting linear motion in bothaxes. To determine which G code to use, image yourself sitting on the tool tip facing in thedirection of the tool motion. If the workpiece is on your right, the correct code is G42. If theworkpiece is on your left, the correct code is G41.

3. Entry into and exit from the workpiece should be perpendicular to the surface of theworkpiece.

4. To switch from G41 to G42 and vice versa, program the appropriate G code in a block withlinear axis movement. The axis movement programmed with the TNRC switch must beG00 or G01. Unless an axis reversal is being performed, this linear motion must benon-cutting.

5. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following modes: G32, G34, G71,G72, G73, G74, G75, G76, and G92.

6. When TNRC is active, only one data block which does not contain axis motion may be pro-grammed between blocks which contain axis motion. If two or more non-motion blocks areprogrammed consecutively, undesirable machine behavior in the form of undercutting orovercutting may occur.

7. If TNRC is to be used with G90 or G94 canned cycles, TNRC must be activated prior tothe block that specifies the G90 or G94 cycle.

8. If TNRC is to be used with a G70 multiple repetitive finishing cycle, TNRC must be acti-vated in the move to the start point prior to the execution of the G70 cycle.

9. When clearing the workpiece:

Using diameter programming, program axis motion to move the tool nose away from theworkpiece a distance of at least three times the tool nose diameter.

Using radius programming, program axis motion to move the tool nose away from theworkpiece a distance of at least three times the tool nose radius.

2-10 M-289

Page 57: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

M-289 2-11

Page 58: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

2-12 M-289

Page 59: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

FEEDRATEFeedrate is specified by the value after the word address F. This value can be expressed in

inches or millimeters per minute in G98 mode or as inches or millimeters per revolution in G99mode. Maximum programmable feedrate is 400 inches/min [10160 mm/min] for the X and Zaxes. Programmed feedrates greater than this maximum value will default to this maximumvalue upon program execution.

To convert inch/min [mm/min] to inch/rev [mm/rev], divide the inch/min [mm/min] feedrate bythe programmed spindle speed:

English: inch/min ÷ rpm = inch/rev

Metric: mm/min ÷ rpm = mm/rev

To convert inch/rev [mm/rev] to inch/min [mm/min], multiply the inch/rev [mm/rev] feedrate bythe programmed spindle speed:

English: inch/rev x rpm = inch/min

Metric: mm/rev x rpm = mm/min

Use % FEEDRATE / % RAPID OVERRIDE switch “A”, Figure 3.1, to override programmedfeedrates and rapid traverse. The % FEEDRATE / % RAPID OVERRIDE switch is not activeduring threading cycles unless it is set to 0%.

M-289 3-1

Figure 3.1 - Manual Pulse Generator Panel

TI1549

A

Page 60: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMINGIn absolute programming, the X and Z data words are used to specify the end point of a

move as a coordinate on the work coordinate system. For example, the following command callsfor a linear move to position the tool nose reference point at X.25 Z5. on the work coordinatesystem:

G01 G20 G98 X.25 Z5. F10. ;

In incremental programming, the U and W words are used to specify the end point of a moveas an incremental distance from the current position on the work coordinate system.

U = Incremental diameter change on the X axis

U- = Away from the operator

U+ = Toward the operator

W = Incremental distance on the Z axis

W- = Toward the spindle face

W+ = Away from the spindle face

For example, the following command calls for a linear move in which the cross slide moves.25 inches toward the operator and the carriage moves 2.5 inches toward the spindle face:

G01 G20 G98 U.5 W-2.5 F10. ;

Absolute and Incremental commands may be used together in a block. For example, the fol-lowing command causes the cross slide to move .375 inches away from the operator from thecurrent cross slide position and also positions the carriage at Z coordinate point 6.5 on the workcoordinate system:

G01 G20 G98 U-.75 Z6.5 F10. ;

If both X and U or Z and W are programmed in the same block, the one specified later is ef-fective. For example, the following block causes the carriage to move .5 inches in the +Z direc-tion from the current carriage position. (The Z word is ignored).

G01 G20 G98 Z.4 W.5 F10. ;

3-2 M-289

Page 61: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

INTERPOLATIONInterpolation describes the function of the control when it decodes a block of programmed

data commanding axis motion. Given the type of motion, the feedrate, and the end point, thecontrol defines the tool path by generating a series of intermediate points between the currentslide position and the programmed end point. In the case of tapers and arcs, it also calculatesthe proper feedrate for each axis to produce the correct tool path.

There are two types of interpolation performed by the GE Fanuc 18T control:

Linear InterpolationCircular Interpolation

LINEAR INTERPOLATION

Linear Interpolation is commanded by the G01 command. This is active after machinepower-up and machine reset. G01 is a modal code, which means that it will stay active until aG00, G02, G03, G32, G34, G90, G92, or G94 is programmed. Therefore, it is necessary to pro-gram a G01 to return to Linear Interpolation from a currently active G00, G02, G03, G32, G34,G90, G92, or G94 code because these codes are also modal.

With G01 active, program blocks command the tool to move in a straight line from its currentposition to a programmed end point. This end point is specified as either a coordinate position(X,Z) on the work coordinate system or as an incremental movement (U,W) from the current po-sition of the tool nose reference point. The following two examples are written in inch mode:

G01 G99 X.25 Z2. F.008 ;

The tool nose reference point moves from the current position to work coordinateX.25 Z2.

G01 G99 U.4 W-1. F.008 ;

The X axis moves .2 inches in the positive direction as the Z axis moves 1 inch inthe negative direction.

Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius

- NOTE -Insert chamfer/insert corner radius cannot be programmed in a threadcutting block.

If two linear (G01) moves intersect, it is possible to insert a chamfer or an arc between themwithout adding a third program block or switching from Linear Interpolation to Circular Interpola-tion and back again. The following rules apply:

1. Both moves must be a G01 move.

2. The end point of the first block is the point where the linear moves would intersect if therewas no chamfer or corner radius inserted. It is not the start point of the chamfer or cornerradius.

INSERT CHAMFERTo insert a chamfer, program a “,C” word in the first of the two linear move (G01) blocks.

These two linear moves do not have to be perpendicular to each other. The value of “,C” is un-signed. The comma (,) must precede the C word.

The control calculates the theoretical intersection point of the two linear moves and thenstarts and ends the inserted chamfer equidistant from the theoretical intersection point.

M-289 3-3

Page 62: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

INSERT CORNER RADIUSTo insert an arc between two linear (G01) moves, program a “,R” word in the first motion

block. The value of the “,R” word is the radius of the arc to be inserted. The value of “,R” is un-signed. The comma (,) must precede the R word.

- NOTE -The control will try to blend the inserted chamfer into the two linear moves. The in-serted radius MUST BLEND into the linear moves on each side of it.

Figure 3.2 illustrates an Insert Chamfer/Corner Radius programming example and Figure 3.3illustrates the Insert Chamfer/Corner Radius programming format.

ALARM MESSAGESAlarm 050:

Chamfer or corner radius is commanded in a block which also includes a threadcuttingcommand.

Alarm 051:

The move direction or move amount in the block following a block specifying a chamfer orcorner radius was not adequate.

Alarm 052:

The block after a block specifying a chamfer or corner radius is not in G01 mode. (For ex-ample, the second block is in G02 or G03 mode).

Alarm 053:

C or R has been programmed without a comma. The comma is required.

Alarm 055:

The axis motion in the second block is less than the chamfer or corner radius value speci-fied in the first block.

3-4 M-289

Figure 3.2 - Insert Chamfer/Radius Sample Program

TI1733

N15 G01 G99 X0. Z0. F.008.;

N20 X.5 ,C.1;

N25 Z-.5 ,C.1;

N30 X1. ,R.1;

N35 W-.5 ,R.1;

N40 X1.5 ,R.1;

N45 Z-1.5;

1.00

.50

.50

1.00

1.50

r=.10 TYP.

NOTE: All X values are Diameters.

.10

.10

CL

Page 63: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M-289 3-5

Figure 3.3 - Insert Chamfer/Insert Arc Diagram

TI2070

,R

X(U)____ ,R____;Z(W)____;

,R

,R,R

+X

+Z

,R

Z(W)____ ,R____;X(U)____;

,R,R

,R

+X

+Z

Insert Arc

,C

,C,C

+Z

,C

Z(W)____ ,C____;X(U)____;

+X

,C

X(U)____ ,C____;Z(W)____;

+X

,C,C

,C

+Z

Insert Chamfer

Page 64: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

In Circular Interpolation the control uses the information contained in a single data block togenerate an arc. There are two types of Circular Interpolation:

Counterclockwise Arc (G02)

Clockwise Arc (G03)

The Electronics Industries Association (EIA) defines clockwise and counterclockwise arcs asfollows:

G02 Counterclockwise Arc (CCW)An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of

the tool with respect to the workpiece is counterclockwise when viewing the plane of motionin the negative direction of the perpendicular axis.

G03 Clockwise Arc (CW)An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of

the tool with respect to the workpiece is clockwise when viewing the plane of motion in thenegative direction of the perpendicular axis.

The phrase “when viewing the plane of motion in the negative direction of the perpendicularaxis” translates to “when viewing the plane of motion in the -Y direction. -Y is toward the bed.Therefore, as viewed by the operator, tool motion during a G02 arc will appear counterclockwiseand tool motion during a G03 arc will appear clockwise.

Besides containing the G code for the rotational direction of tool movement, the data blockspecifying circular interpolation must contain information indicating the position of the arc endpoint and the location of the arc center. Data words used to specify these parameters are sum-marized in Figure 3.4 .

Note the differences in the definitions depending on whether TNRC is active or inactive. Asindicated with TNRC active, the location of the arc end point and arc center is independent ofthe tool nose radius. These dimensions are taken from the part and the control performs thenecessary compensation to generate the proper arc. Refer to “Tool Nose Radius Compensa-tion”, Chapter 2.

3-6 M-289

Page 65: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION PROGRAMMING RULES

1. In Circular Interpolation, the feedrate along the arc (feedrate tangent to the arc) is heldwithin ‘2% of the programmed feedrate.

2. If I and K are to indicate the arc center, and either I or K is equal to zero, that word maybe omitted.

3. If I and K are used to indicate arc center and both I and K are programmed as zero withTNRC inactive, the tool will move linearly from the arc start point to the arc end point. How-ever, if I and K are programmed as zero with TNRC active, alarm message “038 PRO-GRAM” will appear on the CRT screen. This alarm indicates that overcutting will occur be-cause the arc start point coincides with the arc center.

4. If I, K, and R are programmed in the same data block, the control will ignore the I and Kand generate the arc using R to locate the arc center.

5. If R is used to locate an arc center, a zero degree arc is assumed (no tool motion occurs)if one of the following three conditions occurs:

a) If X and Z are the coordinates of the start point.

b) If X, U, Z, and W are omitted.

c) If U and W are programmed as zero (U0. W0.).

6. If R is used to indicate the arc center, but the R value is less than half the distance fromthe arc start point to the arc end point, R is ignored and a half circle is produced whichconnects the arc start point and arc end point.

M-289 3-7

Page 66: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

3-8 M-289

Figure 3.4 - Circular Interpolation Parameters

RotationalDirection

Parameter Command

G02

G03

DEFINITION (TNRC ACTIVE)

Location ofArc Center

Location ofArc End Point

I,K

R

X,Z

U,W

Incremental distance from the center ofthe tool nose radius at the start point tothe arc center.

IMPORTANT: This value must besigned. (Also note that this incrementaldistance depends on the size of thetool nose radius.)

Refer to Figure 3.5 .

Incremental distance from the arcstart point to the arc center asmeasured on the workpiece.

IMPORTANT: This value must besigned. (This incrementaldistance remains the sameregardless of the size of the toolnose radius.)

Refer to Figure 3.7 .

Radius of the arc. The radius ismeasured from the center of the toolnose radius to the arc center. Thisvalue is unsigned. (This distancedepends on the size of the tool noseradius.)NOTE: The R word can only be usedwhen the arc ≤ 180 degrees.

Refer to Figure 3.5 .

Radius of the arc. The radius ismeasured from the arc start pointto the arc center as measured onthe workpiece. This value isunsigned. (This distance isindependent of the size of thetool nose radius.)NOTE: The R word can only beused when the arc ≤ 180degrees.

Refer to Figure 3.7 .

Coordinates of the tool nose referencepoint at the arc end point. (Coordinatesdepend on the size of the tool noseradius and geometric configuration ofthe tool nose.)

Refer to Figure 3.6 .

Coordinates of the arc end pointas measured on the workpiece.(These coordinates areindependent of the size of thetool nose radius and geometricconfiguration of the tool nose.)

Refer to Figure 3.8 .

Incremental distance from the positionof the tool nose reference point at thearc start point to the position of the toolnose reference point at the arc endpoint. (Coordinates depend on the sizeof the tool nose radius and geometricconfiguration of the tool nose.)

U is the diameter difference from thestart point to the end point.

Refer to Figure 3.6 .

Incremental distance from the arcstart point to the arc end point asmeasured on the workpiece. (Theincremental distance isindependent of the size of thetool nose radius and geometricconfiguration of the tool nose.)

U is the diameter difference fromthe start point to the end point.

Refer to Figure 3.8 .

+Z

+X

+Z

+X

DEFINITION (TNRC INACTIVE)

Page 67: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M-289 3-9

Figure 3.5 - Arc Center Parameters (TNRC Inactive)

TI1894

K I

R ARC CENTER

ARC CENTER

K

R

I

CLCL

+X

+Z

Figure 3.6 - Arc End Point Parameters (TNRC Inactive)

TI1895

ARC CENTER

ARC CENTER

W

.5 U

CLCL

(X,Z)

W

(X,Z)

.5 U

Figure 3.7 - Arc Center Parameters (TNRC Active)

TI1896

CLK

I

R ARC CENTER

CL ARC CENTER

K

I

R

+X

+Z

Figure 3.8 - Arc End Point Parameters (TNRC Active)

TI1897

CL CL

W

.5 U

ARC CENTER(X,Z)

W

.5 U

ARC CENTER

(X,Z)+Z

Page 68: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

3-10 M-289

Page 69: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETS

WORK SHIFT (Zero Offset)A work shift offset can be used to shift the origin of the work coordinate system. Work Shift

values (Z) are stored in the Work Shift file. Whatever value is stored in this file is active at alltimes except when rendered ineffective by a G50 Absolute Register Preset command.

- CAUTION -The Work Shift file contains an X and a Z shift register. It is strongly recom-mended that the X axis register in the Work Shift file be set to zero at all times.

The value entered into the Work Shift file MUST be a NEGATIVE number.

The values stored in the Work Shift file are added to the Absolute Position registers, thusshifting the origin of the work coordinate system by the amount stored in the Work Shift file. Forexample, if the Z axis is at 12 inches and the operator stores Z-2.5 in the Work Shift file, the Ab-solute Position registers would then display Z9.5 [12 +(- 2.5)].

Immediately after a Work Shift value is stored, the control adds it to the Absolute Position reg-isters. The registers will remain modified until the Work Shift offset values are set to zero by theoperator, set to zero from the part program, or until a G50 Absolute Register Preset is com-manded. (A G50 command forces the Absolute Position registers to display the X and Z valuesthat appear in the G50 block). Even after a Zero Return operation is performed, the Work Shiftoffsets will modify the Absolute Position registers.

Typically, the workpiece length (distance from the spindle face to the finished face of theworkpiece) is stored as the Z Work Shift offset and the X Work Shift offset IS NOT USED (set tozero). Since the Work Shift value is added to the Absolute Position registers, the part length isstored as a NEGATIVE Z value. With the workpiece length stored in the Work Shift file, the ori-gin of the Absolute coordinate system is the intersection of the finished face of the workpieceand the spindle centerline.

ESTABLISHING Z AXIS WORK SHIFT

1. Load a workpiece into the collet or chuck.

2. Press JOG push button “A”, Figure 4.1, to put the machine in Jog mode.

3. Set % FEEDRATE / % RAPID OVERRIDE switch “I”, Figure 4.2, to the desired setting.

- CAUTION -The machine operator must be sure no interference exists between the spindle,spindle tooling, turret, turret tooling, or workpiece before manually indexing theturret.

4. Use the X and Z axis push buttons to move the turret to a safe position for indexing.

5. Press TURRET INDEX push button “G”, Figure 4.1, to index to an empty turret station tothe active position (toward the spindle).

6. Clean the face of the turret at this station.

7. Use the X and Z push buttons to move the turret to within 1 inch of the face of theworkpiece held in the spindle.

M-289 4-1

Page 70: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

8. Press MPG push button “B”, Figure 4.1 .

- NOTE -The X100 push button is only active on CHNC® IIISP Super-Precision® Machines.

9. Select the desired MPG increment by pressing either the X1, X10, or X100 push button.

10. Press -Z push button “F” or +Z push button “D” to select the Z axis for MPG operation.

11. Using MPG handwheel “H”, Figure 4.2, move the turret close to the face of the workpiece.

12. Placing a shim against the face of the component, gently touch off the turret to the face ofthe workpiece so a slight drag is felt when moving the shim between them.

13. Press the OFFSET SETTING key, Figure 4.3, to display the offset pages.

14. Press the right hand soft key until the W. SHFT soft key is displayed.

4-2 M-289

Figure 4.1 - Operator Control Panel

TI1547

A B

C

D

E

F

G

Figure 4.2 - Manual Pulse Generator Panel

TI1549

H

IJ

K

Page 71: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

15. Press the “W.SHFT” soft key to display the Work Shift registers.

16. If not already set to “0" (zero), set the X value under SHIFT VALUE to ”0" as follows:

a) Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the X data field under SHIFT VALUE.

b) At the MDI keyboard, key in the number “0" (zero). The INPUT soft keys will automati-cally be displayed.

c) Press the INPUT soft key.

17. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the Z data field under SHIFT VALUE.

18. At the MDI keyboard, key in the number “0" (zero). The INPUT soft keys will automaticallybe displayed.

19. Press the INPUT soft key. The Z axis Work Shift will be recorded in the Z SHIFT VALUEregister as a negative value.

- NOTE -The W value at the bottom of the CRT screen will register zero.

20. Enter the shim thickness as a positive value and press the INPUT+ soft key.

21. Turn MPG handwheel “H”, Figure 4.2, in the plus (clockwise) direction to move the turret atleast 1 inch [25 mm] from the face of the workpiece.

22. Press JOG push button “A”, Figure 4.1, to activate Jog mode.

23. Use the X and Z axis push buttons to manually jog the turret to a safe position for index-ing.

M-289 4-3

Figure 4.3 - CRT/MDI PanelTI2803

Page 72: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

STORING A WORK SHIFT OFFSET FROM THE PART PROGRAM

The Work Shift offset may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code.

- CAUTION -The Work Shift file contains an X and Z SHIFT VALUE register. It is strongly rec-ommended that the X SHIFT VALUE register in the Work Shift file be set to zero atall times.

Programming Format:

G10 P0 X0 Z_____ ; or

G10 P0 X0 W____;

P0: Selects the Work Shift offset as the offset file to be modified.

X: Offset value on the X axis (absolute)

Z: Offset value on the Z axis (absolute)

W: Offset value on the Z axis (incremental)

In an absolute command, the value(s) specified in addresses X and/or Z are set as the WorkShift offset value.

In an incremental command, the value(s) specified in address W will be combined with thecurrent Work Shift offset. Use of this command in a program allows the tool to advanceincrementally.

Conflicting Absolute and Incremental word addresses cannot be specified in the same datablock. That is, Z and W may not be programmed in the same block.

4-4 M-289

Page 73: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TOOL OFFSETSINTRODUCTION

The Tool Offset file is made up of two types of offsets: Tool Geometry Offsets and Tool WearOffsets. The control has the capacity to store 32 sets of each offset type (Offset 01 through 32)in separate files. Tool offset values can be entered from the keyboard or from a punched tape.

The following information is stored in the Tool Geometry offset file:

X Tool Dimension:

Distance from the X axis touch-off point to the turret centerline. Sign is determined by thedirection from the tool nose reference point to the X axis turret face. Refer to Figure 4.4 .

Z Tool Dimension:

Distance from the Z axis touch-off point to the turret reference position. Sign is deter-mined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the Z axis turret face. Refer toFigure 4.4 .

Tool Orientation:

The orientation code describes the location of the center of the tool nose in relation to thetool nose reference point. Refer to “Tool Nose Radius Value and Orientation Code”, page4-12.

Tool Nose Radius Value:

The distance from the cutting edge to the center of the tool nose radius.

The Tool Wear Offset file allows the operator toenter minor dimensional changes for each tool tocompensate for tool wear. The Tool Wear Offsetfiles coincide with the Tool Geometry Offset files.When a Tool Geometry offset is activated, thecontrol looks at the corresponding Tool Wear off-set and performs the necessary corrections tocompensate for tool wear.

The Tool Offset files allow the operator to easilymake corrections resulting from tool changes,eliminating large-scale modifications to the partprograms.

Tool Offsets are activated by the last two digitsin the T word. The data word format for the Tword is T4.

(Continued on next page)

M-289 4-5

Figure 4.4 - Signs for ToolGeometry Offsets

TI1558

SpindleFace

-X -Z-X +Z

+X -Z+X +Z

Page 74: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- CAUTION -Information stored in the Geometry and Wear Offset files is NOT automaticallyconverted into the correct units when a programmed G20 or G21 commandswitches programming resolution from inch to metric or vice versa. Offsets inthe desired unit of measure should be entered after the control has been set tothe proper mode, inch (G20) vs metric (G21). If a G20 or G21 is programmed afterthe tool offsets are entered, the decimal point will be shifted one place to the leftor right. If start-up mode is G20 (inch) and the program switches to G21 (metric),the offset decimal point will shift one place to the right. If start-up mode is G21(metric) and the program switches to G20 (inch), the offset decimal point willshift one place to the left.

A suggested method for numbering offsets which will assign a number related to its turret sta-tion is as follows:

Turret Station 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

First Offset 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

Second Offset 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Third Offset 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

TO STORE TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSETS IN MEMORY

Tool offset values can be entered manually from the keyboard or from a punched tape.

Setting Tool Offsets for Non-Center Working Tools(Square Shank Tools, Boring Bars, etc.)

1. Load a workpiece of known diameter and length into the collet or chuck.

2. If it has not already been done, set the Work Shift Offset following the procedure beginningon page 4-1.

3. Press JOG push button “A”, Figure 4.1, to select Jog mode.

4. Set % FEEDRATE / % RAPID override switch “I”, Figure 4.2, to the desired setting. A set-ting of 150% will equal a jog feedrate of approximately 37.5 in/min [952 mm/min].

- CAUTION -The machine operator must be sure that no interference exists between the spin-dle, spindle tooling, turret, turret tooling, or workpiece before manually indexingthe turret.

5. Jog the turret to a safe position for indexing.

6. Press TURRET INDEX push button “G”, Figure 4.1, to index the turret to the selected sta-tion.

7. Mount the tool onto the turret. Be sure to adjust the tool to the correct center height.

8. Jog the tool tip to within 1 inch [25 mm] of the face of the workpiece held in the spindle.

9. Press MPG push button “B”.

10. Press -Z push button “F” or +Z push button “D” to select the Z axis for MPG operation.

4-6 M-289

Page 75: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTE -The X100 push button is only active on CHNC® IIISP Super-Precision® Machines.

11. Select the desired MPG increment by pressing either the X1, X10, or X100 push button.

12. Place a shim against the face of the workpiece and turn MPG handwheel “H”, Figure 4.2,in the negative direction to gently touch the tool tip to the shim so that a slight drag is feltwhen moving the shim.

13. Press the OFFSET SETTING key, Figure 4.3 .

14. Press the OFFSET soft key to access the Tool Offset pages.

15. Press the GEOM soft key to display the Tool Geometry Offset pages.

16. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor at the Z axis field for the desired off-set.

17. Press the (OPRT) soft key.

18. Key in the number “Z0" (zero).

19. Press the MEASUR soft key. The Z axis offset value for the tool will now be displayed un-der the appropriate offset number, as selected in step 16.

20. Enter the shim thickness as a negative (-) value and press the INPUT+ soft key.

21. Turn MPG handwheel “H” in the positive (+) direction to clear the workpiece.

22. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the X axis field for the desired offset.

23. Press -X push button “C” or +X push button “E”, Figure 4.1 to select the X axis for MPGoperation.

24. If touching off an O.D. working tool, turn the handwheel in the plus direction to place thetool tip beyond the O.D. of the part as shown in Figure 4.5 .

If touching off an I.D. working tool, turn the handwheel in the minus direction to place thetool tip inside of the part O.D. as shown in Figure 4.5 .

25. Press -Z push button “F” or +Z push button “D”, Figure 4.1 to select the Z axis for MPG op-eration.

M-289 4-7

Figure 4.5 - O.D. and I.D. Tool Touch-off Points

TI1898

Workpiece

Shim

O.D. Tool

Workpiece

Shim

I.D. Tool+Z

+X

Page 76: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

26. If touching off an O.D. working tool, turn the handwheel in the minus direction until the tooltip is beyond the face of the workpiece in the minus Z direction.

If touching off an I.D. working tool, turn the handwheel in the minus direction to move thetool tip to within .125 inches [3.2mm] of the workpiece face.

27. Press -X push button “C” or +X push button “E” to select the X axis for MPG operation.

28. Place the shim against the O.D. of the workpiece and turn the handwheel in the appropri-ate direction until the tool tip gently makes contact with the shim, as shown in Figure 4.5 .

29. Key in the diameter of the workpiece as a positive value.

Example: Diameter = 1.125

Input = X1.125

30. Press the MEASUR soft key. The X axis offset value for the tool will now be displayed un-der the appropriate offset number.

31. Compensate for shim thickness:

If touching off an O.D. working tool and the control is set for diameter programming, entertwice the shim thickness as a negative (-) value and press the INPUT+ soft key.

If touching off an O.D. working tool and the control is set for radius programming, enter theshim thickness as a negative (-) value and press the INPUT+ soft key.

If touching off an I.D. working tool, no shim compensation is needed.

32. Turn the handwheel in the + direction to clear the diameter of the workpiece by at least 1inch [25 mm] in the +X direction.

33. Press -Z Handle push button “F” or +Z push button “D”, Figure 4.1 to select the Z axis forMPG operation.

34. Turn the handwheel in the + direction to clear the face of the workpiece by at least 1 inch[25 mm] in the +Z direction.

35. Press JOG push button “A”, Figure 4.1, to select Jog mode.

36. Jog the turret to a safe position for indexing.

37. Index the turret to the next tool station which is to be set.

38. Repeat steps 7 through 37 as required for other tools.

4-8 M-289

Page 77: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Setting Tool Offsets for Center-Working Tools

- CAUTION -This procedure is to be used for center-working tools such as drills, taps, andreamers ONLY.

The X axis Wear Offset must always set to zero for center-working tools.

1. If it has not already been done, set the Work Shift Offset following the procedure beginningon page 4-1.

2. Press JOG push button “A”, Figure 4.1, to select Jog mode.

3. Set % FEEDRATE / % RAPID override switch “I”, Figure 4.2, to the desired setting. A set-ting of 150% will equal a jog feedrate of approximately 37.5 in/min [952 mm/min].

- CAUTION -The machine operator must be sure that no interference exists between the spin-dle, spindle tooling, turret, turret tooling, or workpiece before manually indexingthe turret.

4. Jog the turret to a safe position for indexing.

5. Insert the center gauge bar into the collet or chuck and press COLLET CLOSE push button“K”.

6. Press TURRET INDEX push button “G”, Figure 4.1, to index the turret to the selected sta-tion.

7. Mount the round shank tool holder on the turret station facing the spindle. Do not com-pletely secure the tool holder to the turret. The operator must be able to move the toolholder by hand.

8. Jog the tool holder to within 1 inch [25 mm] of the face of the center gauge bar held in thespindle.

9. Press MPG push button “B”.

10. Press -Z push button “F” or +Z push button “D” to select the Z axis for MPG operation.

- NOTE -The X100 push button is only active on CHNC® IIISP Super-Precision® Machines.

11. Select the desired MPG increment by pressing either the X1, X10, or X100 push button.

12. Turn MPG handwheel “H”, Figure 4.2, in the negative direction and guide the tool holderonto the center gauge bar.

13. Secure the tool holder to the turret top plate.

14. Press the OFFSET SETTING key, Figure 4.3 .

15. Press the OFFSET soft key to access the Tool Offset pages.

16. Press the GEOM soft key to access the Geometry Offset pages.

M-289 4-9

Page 78: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

17. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor at the X axis field for the desired off-set.

18. Press the (OPRT) soft key.

19. Key in “X0" (zero).

20. Press the MEASUR soft key. The X axis tool offset value for the tool will now be displayedunder the appropriate offset number, as selected in step 17.

21. Turn MPG handwheel “H” in the positive direction to move the tool holder off the centergauge bar by at least .25 inches [6.5mm].

22. Press JOG push button “A”, Figure 4.1, to select Jog mode.

23. Jog the turret to a safe position for indexing.

24. Repeat steps 6 through 23, as required, for setting the X axis tool offset for other cen-ter-working tool holders.

- When all center-working tool holders are mounted, proceed to step 25.

25. Press COLLET OPEN push button “J”, Figure 4.2, and remove the center gauge bar fromthe spindle.

26. Load a workpiece of known length into the collet or chuck.

27. Jog the turret to a position suitable for mounting the center-working tool(s) in the toolholder(s).

28. If necessary, press TURRET INDEX push button “G”, Figure 4.1, to index the turret to theselected station.

29. Mount the center-working tool in the tool holder at the desired length.

30. Jog the tool tip to within 1 inch [25 mm] of the face of the workpiece held in the spindle.

31. Press MPG push button “B”.

32. Press -Z push button “F” or +Z push button “D” to select the Z axis for MPG operation.

- NOTE -The X100 push button is only active on CHNC® IIISP Super-Precision® Machines.

33. Select the desired MPG increment by pressing either the X1, X10, or X100 push button.

34. Place a shim against the face of the workpiece and turn MPG handwheel “H”, Figure 4.2,in the negative direction to gently touch the tool tip to the shim so that a slight drag is feltwhen moving the shim.

35. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Z axis field for the desired offset.

36. Key in “Z0" (zero).

37. Press the MEASUR soft key. The Z axis offset value for the tool will now be displayed un-der the appropriate offset number, as selected in step 14.

38. Enter the shim thickness as a negative (-) value and press the INPUT+ soft key.

4-10 M-289

Page 79: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

39. Turn the handwheel in the positive (+) direction to clear the workpiece.

40. Press JOG push button “A”, Figure 4.1, to select Jog mode.

41. Repeat steps 27 through 40, as required, for setting the Z axis tool offset for other cen-ter-working tool holders.

Resetting Wear Offsets42. Press the left-hand soft key to return to the offset selection soft keys.

43. Press the WEAR soft key to access the Wear Offset pages.

44. Reset the X and Z WEAR offset for each tool that was just installed:

a) Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor at the X axis field for the desiredoffset.

b) Key in “0" (zero) and press the INPUT soft key.

c) Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Z axis field for the desired offset.

d) Key in “0" (zero) and press the INPUT soft key.

M-289 4-11

Page 80: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TOOL NOSE RADIUS VALUE AND ORIENTATION CODE

- NOTE -If Tool Nose Radius Compensation (TNRC) is to be used, the tool nose radiusvalue and the tool quadrant must be entered for each tool which uses TNRC.

1. Press the OFFSET SETTING key, Figure 4.3 .

2. Press the OFFSET soft key to access the Tool Offset pages.

3. Press the GEOM soft key to display the tool geometry offsets.

4. Press the (OPRT) soft key.

5. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor at the R data field for the desired off-set.

6. Enter the tool nose radius value and press the INPUT soft key.

- NOTE-The “T” value defines the orientation of the tool tip and has a range from 0 through9. Refer to Figure 4.6 .

7. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the T data field for the desired offset.

8. Enter the tool orientation code number and press the INPUT soft key.

9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for each tool, as required.

4-12 M-289

Figure 4.6 - Tool Nose Orientation Codes

TI1557

6

8

75

21

34

+Z

0 or 9

SpindleFace

TurretFace

+Z

+X

-X

Page 81: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TO STORE TOOL OFFSETS FROM THE PART PROGRAM

Tool Offsets may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code. Tool Geom-etry offset signs are shown in Figure 4.4 .

Programming Format:

G10 P__ X_____ Z_____ R_____ Q_____ ; or

G10 P__ U_____ W____ C_____ Q_____;

P: Selects the Tool Offset file to be modified.

For Wear Offset amount: P= Wear Offset numberFor Geometry Offset amount: P= 100 + Wear Offset number

Examples of P words used for Geometry Offset:

For Geometry Offset #1 : P word = P1001For Geometry Offset #15: P word = P10015

X: Offset value on the X axis (absolute)

Z: Offset value on the Z axis (absolute)

U: Offset value on the X axis (incremental)

W: Offset value on the Z axis (incremental)

R: Tool nose radius offset value (absolute)

C: Tool nose radius offset value (incremental)

Q: Tool nose orientation code

M-289 4-13

Page 82: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ADJUSTING TOOL WEAR OFFSETS

1. Press the OFFSET SETTING key, Figure 4.3 .

2. Press the OFFSET soft key to display the offset pages.

3. Press the WEAR soft key to display the Tool Wear screen.

4. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor at the X axis field for the desired off-set.

5. Press the (OPRT) soft key.

6. Enter the X axis WEAR value as follows

If the control is set for diameter programming, enter the measured wear offset as a diame-ter value.

If the control is set for radius programming, enter one half the measured (diameter) wearoffset value.

7. Press the INPUT+ soft key.

8. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Z axis field for the desired offset.

9. Enter the Z axis wear value.

10. Press the INPUT+ key.

11. Repeat steps 4 through 10 for each tool, as required.

Rules for Adjusting Wear Offsets1. Negative (-) offset values MUST be signed.

2. Wear offset values may not exceed .50000 inches [12.7000 mm].

4-14 M-289

Page 83: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ACTIVATING TOOL OFFSETS

Tool offsets are activated by a T word having the format T4. The first two digits select the tur-ret face to be indexed to the cutting position. The last two digits specify which tool offsets in thetool offset table are to be used with the selected turret position.

Example: N0120 T0616 ;

In data block N0120, turret station 6 will be indexed to the cutting position and the tool Geom-etry and Wear offsets stored on line 16 in the respective offset tables will be activated.

The leading zero in the T word may be omitted: T0101 = T101

- CAUTION -If tool offsets are not to be called up with a turret index, the last two digits in the Tword MUST be “00"” (Example: T0100). If no digits are programmed in the lasttwo places, the control will use the digits programmed in the first two places asthe tool offset and the turret will not index (Example: T01 will be interpreted bythe control as T0001).

- NOTE -When a T0 is commanded, the offset is canceled.

Tool offset cancellation (T0) will occur in the next programmed axis movement for the X andZ axes. The next programmed X axis movement will cancel the X axis offset and move the turretreference point to the programmed X axis position. The next programmed Z axis movement willcancel the Z axis offset and move the turret reference point to the programmed Z axis position.

When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block with axis motion, the tool offsetmotion is computed with the programmed axis position, causing the slide(s) to move directly tothe corrected axis position at the programmed feedrate.

When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block without axis motion, the tool offsetmove will occur in the next block with axis motion. The tool offset motion is computed with theprogrammed axis position, causing the slide(s) to move directly to the corrected axis position atthe programmed feedrate.

Tool offsets are deactivated when the machine is first powered up or when the control RESETkey, Figure 4.3, is pressed.

M-289 4-15

Page 84: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

4-16 M-289

Page 85: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

HOW THE CONTROL POSITIONS THE SLIDESTo understand work coordinate programming, it is helpful to consider how the control posi-

tions the slides. We will begin by examining how the slides are positioned on a manual machine.At the onset this may seem like an in-depth discussion of the obvious, but bear with us, thepoint of this exercise is to show the similarities between the operation of a manual machine andthe operation of the CHNC® III Chucker and Bar Machine.

On a manual machine, the carriage and cross slide are positioned by manually turning a han-dle attached to a lead screw. The operator positions each slide by reading the dial attached toeach handle. Let’s assume that on the manual machine each slide has 10 pitch lead screw.Therefore, each revolution of the lead screw advances the slide .1 inch. If the dial has 100 grad-uations, each graduation equals 1/100 of a revolution or .001 inch slide travel.

If the operator wants to move a slide .306 inch, he turns the handle in the desired directionand counts three and 6/100 revolutions of the dial. How close to 6/100 of a revolution he getslargely depends on his ability to manually position the dial at the proper graduation.

Like the slides on the manual machine, the CHNC III Chucker and Bar Machine carriage andcross slide are positioned by rotating a lead screw. But there are no handles to rotate the CHNCIII Chucker and Bar Machine lead screws. Instead, each lead screw is rotated by a servo motor.The revolutions of each screw are counted by an encoder. The encoder is an integral part of theaxis drive motor and continuously monitors the radial position of the lead screw. Informationfrom the encoder is fed to the control where it is converted into useful output information to pro-duce the correct feedrate and slide position.

The carriage (Z axis) and cross slide (X axis) on the CHNC III Chucker and Bar Machineeach have a 5 millimeter pitch lead screw. One revolution of the lead screw equals 5 millimeters[.1969 inches] of slide travel. As the lead screw rotates so does the encoder shaft, which causesthe encoder to generate a series of electrical pulses commonly referred to as counts. Theseelectrical pulses are fed to the control for positioning and velocity control commands.

To move a slide .306 inch, we enter a coded instruction into the control specifying type of mo-tion (linear or circular), velocity (feedrate), and distance. (Distance can be indicated as an incre-mental distance from the current position or as a coordinate that represents the end point of themove.) Internally, the control decodes the instruction and converts the command into a voltagewhich is sent to the servo motor of the slide. As the servo motor turns the lead screw, the leadscrew turns the encoder shaft and the encoder produces electrical counts. These counts aresent back to the control where they are used to monitor the slide position and feedrate.

The distance from the current slide position to the commanded end point is known as the Dis-tance To Go. Before any slide motion takes place in our example, the distance to go is .306inch. This value is stored in a register in the control. As the lead screw rotates, the control re-ceives counts from the encoder and subtracts them from the Distance To Go register. When theDistance To Go registers count down to zero, the control knows that the slide has moved .3060(±.0001) inch on the CHNC III machine and .30600 (±.00001) inch on the CHNC III Super-Preci-sion® machine.

M-289 5-1

Page 86: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

This feedback arrangement, in which the actual slide movement is compared with the com-mand originating from the control, is known as a closed loop system. Besides the closed loopsystem for slide position discussed above, there is also a closed loop system for feedrate, whichmakes use of the electrical pulses produced by the encoder.

By making use of the feedback information it receives from the encoder, the control can accu-rately move a slide a commanded distance at a commanded feedrate. As one might expect, be-fore this accurate closed loop positioning system can be used, the control must be synchronizedwith the machine tool. That is, the position coordinates indicated by the control must be made toreflect the actual position of the slides. This is done by performing a Reference Home (Zero Re-turn) operation.

REFERENCE HOME (ZERO RETURN)

- NOTE -All discussions throughout this manual concerning X axis positioning, unless other-wise stated, are based on diameter programming.

When the CONTROL ON push button is pressed to start up the machine, the control does notknow the position of the slides. To synchronize the control/machine tool system, each slide mustbe moved to its Reference Home position. This position is also referred to as Reference Zero orZero Return.

Depending on whether the machine has been set up to operate in inch or metric mode, a Ref-erence Home operation positions the slides as indicated in Table 5.1 .

The X axis Reference Home coordinate is twice the actual distance from the spindle center-line to the top plate reference point after a Reference Home operation has been performed.

The Z axis Reference Home coordinate is the actual distance from the spindle face to thefront edge of the top plate after a Reference Home operation has been performed.

After both slides have been moved to the Reference Home position, the Machine Registersare automatically set to the values shown in Table 5.1 . (These coordinates are relative to azero point located at the intersection of the spindle face and spindle centerline.) A discussion ofthe coordinate system begins on the next page.

- NOTE -The actual Reference Home coordinates are established through machine parame-ters. Refer to Chapter 10 for information on switching between inch and metricmode.

5-2 M-289

OperationalMode

X Axis ReferenceHome Coordinate

Z Axis ReferenceHome Coordinate

Inch 6.0000 12.0000

Metric 152.400 304.800

Table 5.1 - Inch and Metric Reference Home Coordinates

Page 87: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

HOW THE MACHINE ESTABLISHES THE REFERENCE POINT POSITION

This section explains the mechanics of how the machine establishes the Reference Home po-sition during a Reference Home operation. It is not necessary for the operator or programmer tomaster this information, it is included here to provide a more complete picture of how theCHNC® III Chucker and Bar Machine operates.

For the carriage, the home signal is produced by a mechanical limit switch that is located onthe bed. This switch is activated by a trip block, which is attached to the carriage, when the car-riage is a specific distance from the Reference Home position.

For the cross slide, the home signal is produced by a mechanical limit switch that is locatedon the cross slide. This switch is activated by a trip block when the cross slide is a specific dis-tance from the Reference Home position.

When the control receives each coarse home signal, it knows that the respective slide iswithin the specified distance of the Reference Home position. The ball screws continue to rotateas the control counts encoder pulses until the slides are within .0001 inch [.003mm] of Refer-ence Home. After both axes have been homed, the actual position displays the Reference Homecoordinates.

X AND Z AXESWe label the axis of motion parallel to the spindle centerline as the Z axis and the axis of mo-

tion parallel to the spindle face as the X axis. Throughout this manual we will refer to the car-riage as the Z Axis and the cross slide as the X Axis. These letter designations for the two axesare recommended by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) and the International StandardsOrganization (ISO). In an effort to promote interchangeability and prevent misunderstandings be-tween NC manufacturers and purchasers, EIA has set forth recommended standards for suchthings as axis and motion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape, operational com-mand and data format, and electrical interface between numerical controls and machine tools.

RECTANGULAR COORDINATESTo establish a system of relating the position of the tool to a position on the workpiece, we

must first set up a system where we can define the location of a given point relative to a knownreference point. Because we have mutually perpendicular axes (X and Z), we can use rectangu-lar coordinates (also known as Cartesian coordinates) to describe the location of any point atwhich the tool can be positioned.

There is nothing out of the ordinary about rectangular coordinates. They are used on such ev-eryday objects as maps and tickets to sports events. For example, in order to easily identify thelocation of a city, a map maker will set up two perpendicular axes. These two axes give everycity its unique set of coordinates.

Similarly, reserved seats at stadiums are identified as a certain seat in a given row. (Seatsand rows are mutually perpendicular axes.)

To apply the use of rectangular coordinates when programming the CHNC III Chucker andBar Machine, it is necessary to define two reference points:

1. A zero point (X0 Z0) for the work coordinate system.

2. A tool nose reference point.

Before discussing how the registers can be modified, let’s first consider the location of eachreference point after a Reference Home operation has been performed.

M-289 5-3

Page 88: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

POSITION REGISTERS

The power-up procedure calls for a Reference Home operation to synchronize the control/ma-chine tool system. This operation sets the registers at their initial values. After performing theReference Home procedure, press the POS key and then press the PAGE push button until allfour pairs of position registers are displayed on the CRT screen as shown in Figures 5.1 or 5.2 .

- NOTE -The “Distance To Go” registers are only displayed in Auto or MDI mode.

For this discussion, we are concerned with the MACHINE and ABSOLUTE position registers.The MACHINE registers display the location of the tool nose reference point relative to the ma-chine Zero Return (Reference Zero) position. Unless modified by a tool offset, the tool nose ref-erence point is at the intersection of the tooling top plate “0" (zero) position and the front face ofthe tooling top plate.

5-4 M-289

(RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)

U 6.0000 X 6.0000

W 12.0000 Z 12.0000

(MACHINE) (DISTANCE TO GO)

X 0.0000 X 0.00000

Z 0.0000 Z 0.00000

Figure 5.1 - Position Registers (Inch Mode)

(RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)

U 152.400 X 152.400

W 304.800 Z 304.800

(MACHINE) (DISTANCE TO GO)

X 0.0000 X 0.0000

Z 0.0000 Z 0.0000

Figure 5.2 - Position Registers (Metric Mode)

Page 89: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Recall that the Reference Home position is a point located 3 inches [76.2 mm] in front of thespindle centerline and 12 inches [304.8 mm] from the spindle face. The MACHINE registers callthis point X0 Z0 and display the position of the tool nose reference point relative to this position.These registers cannot be modified. They always display the “true” axis position relative to theReference Home position.

Of greater interest to the programmer are the ABSOLUTE Position registers, which can bemodified. The ABSOLUTE position registers display the position of the tool nose reference pointas a coordinate on the work coordinate system. The work coordinate system is a rectangular co-ordinate system with it’s origin (origin = X0. Z0.) equal to the X0. Z0. coordinate position of theABSOLUTE registers.

Unless a Work Shift offset is used, after a Reference Home operation, the origin of thework coordinate system is the intersection of the spindle face and the spindle centerline.

Unless a tool offset is used, the tool nose reference point is the intersection of the topplate reference point and the top plate face toward the spindle.

Unless modified by a Work Shift offset, the coordinate system relates the tool nose refer-ence point to the spindle face and spindle centerline.

To simplify programming, the programmer can modify the coordinate system to relate the lo-cation of the tool tip to coordinates on the workpiece. Hardinge recommends that part programsare written using the Safe-Start format, which makes use of the Work Shift Offset and Tool Off-sets. Refer to Chapter 10 for information about programming using the Hardinge Safe Start/Endprogramming format.

For additional information, refer to “Feedrate”, “Absolute and Incremental Programming”, and“Linear Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.

M-289 5-5

Page 90: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

5-6 M-289

Page 91: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLES

CANNED TURNING CYCLE (G90)The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multi-

ple turning passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may be ei-ther a straight turn or a taper turn.

Figures 6.1 and the accompanying program illustrate an elementary part which is to have a1.000 inch long, .500 inch diameter turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1 inch. The faceof the part extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since the part face is set to Z0 bythe G10 command in block N20, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.

The X and Z Axis tool offsets are specified through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Inthe G90 sample programs Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the programmer toprogram the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle centerlineand Z Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine coordinatesystem. If a Z Axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z Axis position of the tool tip will be posi-tioned in relation to the shifted Z0, as established by the Work Shift offset.

Since all dimensions are in inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric data input mode (G21).

G90 STRAIGHT TURNING (Figure 6.1)

N10 G20 ; N90 G99 G90 X0.875 Z-1. F0.02 ;G65 P9150 H1.5 ; N100 X0.75 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N110 X0.625 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N120 X0.532 ;N30 G97 M13 ; N130 X0.5 F0.002 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N140 G1 ;N50 T0101 ; N150 M98 P1 ;N60 X1.1 Z0.1 ; N160 M1 ;N70 G50 S4500 ; N170 M30 ;N80 G96 S1000 ;

M-289 6-1

Figure 6.1 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle:Straight Turning

2.735

.735

.500

1.000

.500

1.100

1.000 .100Start Point

CL

Spindle Face Chuck Face

TI1783

Page 92: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

The cutting tool path is a box pattern. Since the Start Point is also the point to which the toolreturns on the return path, the Start Point X axis coordinate is located outside the workpiece di-ameter. This assures that the tool will completely face the workpiece shoulder on each pass.

The G90 preparatory command is specified in block N90 together with G99 (inch/rev feed),the first pass tool tip position relative to the spindle centerline, the length of cut, and thefeedrate. In subsequent turning cycle blocks (N100 through N130) it is only necessary to specifythe tool tip position relative to the spindle centerline for each pass. Feedrate and spindle speedchanges can also be programmed in these blocks. The % Feedrate Override switch is activeduring the turning passes. To deactivate G90 mode, program another Group 1 G-code. (See theG code chart, located in the Appendix.)

The approach and return paths are executed at rapid traverse rate. This rate can be variedwith the % Rapid Override switch.

If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the parametersMUST be entered prior to the G90 block.

In cases where incremental positioning commands U and W are used in place of absolute po-sitioning commands X and Z, make certain each command has the correct sign.

6-2 M-289

Page 93: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G90 TAPER TURNING (Figure 6.2)

N10 G20 ; N110 X1.5609 ;G65 P9150 H1.5 ; N120 X1.4609 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N130 X1.3609 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N140 X1.2609 ;N30 G97 M13 ; N150 X1.1609 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N160 X1.0609 ;N50 T0101 ; N170 X1.0359 F0.002 ;N60 X2. Z0.5 ; N180 G1 ;N70 G50 S4500 ; N190 M98 P1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N200 M1 ;N90 G42 X1.76 Z.1 ; N210 M30 ;N100 G99 G90 X1.6609 Z-1. R-0.29474 F0.004 ;

- CAUTION -Assuming the X axis workshift is set to zero, the X coordinate values are pro-grammed as POSITIVE values for front turning and NEGATIVE values for backturning.

All rules applying to straight turning in the G90 Canned Turning mode also apply to taperturning in this mode.

Figure 6.2 and its accompanying program illustrate an basic part which is to have a 1 inchlong, 15 degree taper turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1.25 inches. The face of thepart extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since the part face is set to Z0 by theG10 command in block N20, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.

M-289 6-3

Figure 6.2 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle:Taper Turning

TI1784

1.250

Spindle Face Chuck Face

1.6609

1.000

2.735

.500.735

15°

Start Point

.100

.500

1.0359

1.125

1.760

R

CL

Page 94: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ADDITIONAL DATA WORDS

When programming a tapered cut in G90 mode, two additional data words must be pro-grammed:

When taper turning on the front side of the part, G42 must be programmed in a block pre-ceding the G90 block to activate tool nose radius compensation (TNRC). Refer to Chapter2 for information on TNRC.

The amount of taper in the X direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed inthe G90 block. When taper turning on the front side of the part, program the “R” word as aPOSITIVE value if the tool moves in the -X direction as it moves in the -Z direction, as inI.D. work. Program the “R” word as a NEGATIVE value if the tool moves in the +X directionas it moves in the -Z direction, as in O.D. work.

For this example, “R” was determined as follows:

R = (Z + .1) * -( Tan 15o ) (* = Multiplication)

= 1.1 * -.26794... (Unrounded tangent value)

= -.29474 (Result rounded to 5 decimal places)

- NOTE -An important point with G90 taper turning is that the programmed X dimension foreach depth of cut is the X end point dimension of the cutting pass.

6-4 M-289

Page 95: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

MULTIPLE REPETITIVE ROUGH AND FINISH TURNING (G71/G70)The G71 Multiple Repetitive Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of de-

scribing multiple rough turning passes with two blocks of information. The first G71 block speci-fies the amount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract from theworkpiece for the return pass. The second G71 block specifies the data blocks which define thesection of the workpiece to be rough turned and the amount of stock to be left for finish machin-ing. Finally, the G70 preparatory command specifies the section of the workpiece to be finishmachined by specifying the first and last blocks of the required program section.

Figure 6.3 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part that is to be roughturned and finish contoured to the dimensions shown.

The face of the part extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 setsthe part face to Z0, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.

The X and Z Axis tool offsets are specified through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Inthe two G71/G70 sample programs Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the pro-grammer to program the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spin-dle centerline and the Z Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on themachine coordinate system. If a Z Axis Work Shift (G10) is active, the Z Axis position of the tooltip will be positioned in relation to the shifted Z0.

Since all dimensions in the two sample programs are in inch mode, G20 is entered in blockN10. This assures the correct format in case the previously executed program was in metricmode (G21).

- CAUTION -Assuming the X axis workshift is set to zero, the X coordinate values are pro-grammed as POSITIVE values for front turning and NEGATIVE values for backturning.

The X dimension of the start point (Block N90) and the X coordinate programmed in the lastblock describing the contour of the workpiece (Block N210) must be the same and must be lo-cated outside the area occupied by the blank stock. When the cycle is completed, the tool willrapid back to the start point. This move should be a straight Z axis move.

M-289 6-5

Page 96: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G71/G70 TURNING CYCLE (Figure 6.3)

N10 G20 ; N130 G0 X0.25 S1000 ;G65 P9150 H1.5 ; N140 G1 G99 Z-0.25 ,R0.1 F0.004 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N150 X0.55 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N160 X0.8 Z-0.4665 ;N30 G97 M13 ; N170 Z-0.75 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N180 X0.94 ;N50 T0101 ; N190 X1.1 Z-0.83 ;N60 X1.31 Z0.2 ; N200 Z-1. ;N70 G50 S4500 ; N210 X1.305 ;N80 G96 S800 ; N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;N90 G42 X1.305 Z0.1 ; N230 M98 P1 ;N100 G99 ; N240 M1 ;N110 G71 U0.1 R0.025 ; N250 M30 ;N120 G71 P130 Q210 U0.03 W0.015 F0.01 ;

Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough turning cycle:

N110 G71 U0.1 R0.025 ;

Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.

U: Depth of cut of each pass (as a radius value) during the roughing cycle. In this examplethe depth of each cutting pass is .100 inches.

R: Distance the tool will withdraw from the part for the return pass.

6-6 M-289

Figure 6.3 - G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle

TI17852.735

.735 .500

1.000

.830

.750

.4665

.250

.100

1.125 W U/2

.100

1.305

1.100

.940

.800.550

U.250CL

Spindle Face Chuck Face

Start Point

Page 97: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Block N120 will execute the roughing cycle:

N120 G71 P130 Q210 U0.03 W0.015 F0.01 ;

Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be roughed out.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be roughed out.

U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle. Thisis a positive diameter value when turning on the front side of the part.

W: Amount of stock on the Z axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.

F: Feed rate in inches/revolution for the roughing cycle.

- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q datawords.

Block N130 establishes the CSS value for the G70 finishing cycle:

N130 G0 X0.25 S1000 ;

S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.

Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.

N140 G1 G99 Z-0.25 ,R0.1 F0.004 ;

F: The feedrate for the finishing pass.

Block N220 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying thefirst (P) and last (Q) blocks of the required program section.

N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be finish machined.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be finish machined.

- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q datawords.

M-289 6-7

Page 98: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

When the control encounters the second G71 preparatory command block, the amount of fin-ish stock as specified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will movein the direction and distance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) toensure that slide movements occur in the proper direction to leave stock for finishing. If the signis omitted,the control automatically assumes plus (+). In this example the cross slide will move.015 inches in the +U direction and the carriage will move .015 inches in the +W direction. Thecontrol will then cause the machine to execute multiple roughing passes .1 inches deep and aroughing contour pass (shown by the dashed lines in Figure 6.3) that follows the contour as des-ignated by blocks N130 through N210. After completion of the roughing contour pass, the finishpass will be executed according to the program section specified in the G70 block (N220).

The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word inblock N110 (R0.025).

Tool Nose Radius Compensation (TNRC) must be established in a block preceding the G71roughing cycle block if roughing and finishing is performed by the same tool. TNRC is activatedand interpolated in the move to the starting point commanded in block N90. TNRC is deacti-vated at the beginning of the G71 roughing cycle and reactivated after the G71 roughing cycle iscompleted. After the workpiece has been finish machined, TNRC is canceled by the G40 com-mand in subprogram “O1", which is called in block N230. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compen-sation" Chapter 2.

Constant Surface Speed must be established in blocks preceding the G71 roughing cycle.The feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the first G71 block or in thesecond G71 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishing pass must be established inthe part program after the second G71 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishingpass can be changed at will between the starting and ending blocks, as designated by the Pand Q words in the G70 block.

The spindle rotation command (M03, M04, M13, or M14) that must precede entry into CSSmode is programmed in block N30. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word andthe G50 preparatory command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96command in block N80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle is set by the S word in thesame block. A G99 Preparatory command, programmed in block N100, establishes Inch perRevolution feedrate.

Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Feedrate for the finishingpass is established in block N140. CSS is canceled by the G97 command in subprogram “O1"after the workpiece has been finish machined. Also see ”Constant Surface Speed Pro-gramming", in Chapter 10.

6-8 M-289

Page 99: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G71 PROGRAMMING RULES

1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain a Z move.

2. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.

3. The G71 Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle is not designed to rough out pockets.The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern.

4. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designated byP and the end of the cycle designated by Q.

5. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. Thecontrol automatically returns the tool to the start point after the block specified by Q is exe-cuted.

6. When rough and finish turning will be performed by the same tool and Tool Nose RadiusCompensation (TNRC) is to be used, TNRC must be programmed prior to the first G71block. TNRC will be deactivated during the G71 cycle and reactivated after the G71 cycleis completed.

7. If Constant Surface Speed (CSS) is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the firstG71 block.

8. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G71 block. Tool off-set changes for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the P andQ words in the G70 block.

9. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the firstG71 block or in the second G71 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishing cy-cle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70 block.

10. The start point X axis value and the end point X axis value (Q line pull-off value) must bethe same.

M-289 6-9

Page 100: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CANNED FACING CYCLE (G94)The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multi-

ple facing passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may be eitherstraight or taper facing.

Figure 6.4 and the accompanying program illustrate an elementary part having a diameter of1.5 inches that is to be faced back .5 inches with a .5 inch diameter projection remaining.

The X and Z Axis tool offsets are specified through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Inthe G94 sample programs Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the programmer toprogram the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle centerlineand Z Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine coordinatesystem. If a Z Axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z Axis position of the tool tip will be posi-tioned in relation to the shifted Z0.

Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the cor-rect format in case the previously executed program was in metric mode (G21).

G94 STRAIGHT FACING (Figure 6.4)

N10 G20 ; N110 Z-0.1875 ;G65 P9150 H1.5 ; N120 Z-0.25 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-1.9 ; N130 Z-0.3125 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N140 Z-0.375 ;N30 G97 M13 ; N150 Z-0.4375 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N160 Z-0.484 ;N50 T0101 ; N170 Z-0.5 F0.002 ;N60 X1.6 Z0.1 ; N180 G1 ;N70 G50 S4500 ; N190 M98 P1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N200 M1 ;N90 G99 G94 X0.5 Z-0.0625 F0.02 ; N210 M30 ;N100 Z-0.125 ;

6-10 M-289

Figure 6.4 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle: Straight Facing

1.900

.100

1.600

.500

1.500

.400 .500 .500

Start Point

Spindle Face Chuck Face

CL

TI1786

Page 101: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- CAUTION -Assuming the X axis workshift is set to zero, the X coordinate values are pro-grammed as POSITIVE values for facing on the front side and NEGATIVE valuesfor facing on the back side.

The cutting tool path is a box pattern. Since the Start Point is also the point to which the toolreturns on the return path, the Start Point X Axis coordinate is located outside the workpiece di-ameter. This assures that the cutting tool will completely face the workpiece shoulder on eachpass. In the Z direction, the start point was placed in front of the workpiece face to ensure thatthe .5 inch diameter is completely turned on each pass.

The G94 preparatory command is specified in block N90 together with G99 (inch/rev feed),the depth of cut for the first pass (Z) in relation to Z0 (zero), and the diameter to which the fac-ing operation is to extend (X). The feedrate is also specified. In subsequent facing blocks (N100through N170) it is only necessary to specify the depth of cut for each pass in relation to Z0(zero). Feedrate and spindle speed changes can also be programmed in these blocks. The %FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch is active during the facing passes. To deactivate the G94 mode,program another group 1 G code. (See the G Code chart, located in the Appendix).

- CAUTION -All facing passes MUST be toward the spindle centerline. If the facing operationis programmed to face away from the spindle centerline, the cutting tool will ad-vance into the workpiece at the rapid traverse rate.

The approach and return paths are executed at the rapid traverse rate. This rate may be var-ied with the % RAPID OVERRIDE switch.

If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the parametersMUST be entered prior to the G94 block.

In cases where incremental positioning commands U and W are used in place of absolute po-sitioning commands X and Z, make certain each command has the correct sign.

M-289 6-11

Page 102: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G94 TAPER FACING (Figure 6.5)

Figure 6.5 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part with a 1.5 inch diame-ter. This part is faced back .5 inches and leaves a shoulder that tapers back 15 degrees. A .5inch diameter projection remains.

N10 G20 ; N130 Z-0.0875 ;G65 P9150 H1.5 ; N140 Z-0.15 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.025 ; N150 Z-0.2125 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N160 Z-0.275 ;N30 G97 M13 ; N170 Z-0.3375 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N180 Z-0.4 ;N50 T0101 ; N190 Z-0.4625 ;N60 X1.75 Z0.5 ; N200 Z-0.49 ;N70 G50 S4500 ; N210 Z-0.5 F0.002 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N220 G1 ;N90 G41 X1.60 Z0.1 ; N230 M98 P1 ;N100 G99 G94 X0.5 Z.1 R-0.1581 F0.02 ; N240 M1 ;N110 Z0.0375 ; N250 M30 ;N120 Z-0.025;

- CAUTION -Assuming the X axis workshift is set to zero, the X coordinate values are pro-grammed as POSITIVE values for facing on the front side and NEGATIVE valuesfor facing on the back side.

All rules applying to straight facing in the G94 Canned Facing mode also apply to taper facingin this mode.

6-12 M-289

Figure 6.5 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle: Taper Facing

TI17872.025

1.600

.100

Start Point

.500

.1581

.500

1.500

.400

.500

Spindle Face Chuck Face

15o

CL

R

.590

Page 103: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ADDITIONAL DATA WORDS

When programming a tapered cut in G94 mode, two additional data words must be pro-grammed:

When taper facing on the front side of the part, G41 must be programmed in a block pre-ceding the G94 block to activate tool nose radius compensation (TNRC). Refer to Chapter2 for information on TNRC.

The amount of taper in the Z direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed inthe G94 block. Program the “R” word as a POSITIVE value if the tool moves in the +X di-rection as it moves in the +Z direction, as in I.D. work. Program the “R” word as a NEGA-TIVE value if the tool moves in the -X direction as it moves in the +Z direction, as in O.D.work.

For this example, “R” was determined as follows:

R = (.84 - x) * -( Tan 15o ) (* = Multiplication)

= (.84 - .25) * -.26794... (Unrounded tangent value)

= -.15809 (Result rounded to 5 decimal places)

- NOTE -An important point with G94 taper facing is that the programmed Z dimension foreach depth of cut is the Z end point dimension of the cutting pass.

M-289 6-13

Page 104: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

MULTIPLE REPETITIVE ROUGH AND FINISH FACING (G72/G70)The G72 Multiple Repetitive Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of de-

scribing multiple rough facing passes with two blocks of information. The first G72 block speci-fies the amount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract from theworkpiece for the return pass. The second G72 block specifies the data blocks which define thesection of the workpiece to be rough faced, the amount of stock to be left for finish machining,and the feedrate for the G72 roughing cycle. Finally, the G70 preparatory command specifiesthe section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the first and last blocks of therequired program section.

Figure 6.6 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part that is to be rough andfinish contoured to the dimensions shown.

The face of the part extends 2.650 inches from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 setsthe part face to Z0, each successive facing pass will be in the minus Z direction from the previ-ous facing pass.

The X and Z Axis tool offsets are specified through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Inthe two G72/G70 sample programs Tool Offset #2 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the pro-grammer to program the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spin-dle centerline and Z Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the ma-chine coordinate system. If a Z Axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z Axis position of the tool tipwill be positioned in relation to the shifted Z0.

Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the cor-rect format in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.

- CAUTION -Assuming the X axis workshift is set to zero, the X coordinate values are pro-grammed as POSITIVE values for facing on the front side and NEGATIVE valuesfor facing on the back side.

The Z dimension of the start point commanded (Block N90) and the Z coordinate pro-grammed in the last block describing the contour of the workpiece (Block N180) must be thesame and must be located outside the area occupied by the blank stock. When the cycle iscompleted, the tool will rapid back to the start point. This should be a straight X Axis move.

6-14 M-289

Page 105: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G72/G70 FACING CYCLE (Figure 6.6)

N10 G20 ; N110 G72 W0.1 R0.03 ;G65 P9150 H1.5 ; N120 G72 P130 Q180 U0.03 W0.015 F0.01 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.650 ; N130 G0 Z-1.25 S1000 ;N2 (Operator Message) ; N140 G1 G99 X3. F0.004 ;N30 G97 M13 ; N150 Z-0.95235 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N160 X1. Z-0.375 ;N50 T0202 ; N170 X0.75 ;N60 X4.11 Z0.2 ; N180 Z0.1 ;N70 G50 S4500 ; N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;N80 G96 S800 ; N200 M98 P1 ;N90 G41 X4.1 Z0.1 ; N210 M1 ;N100 G99 ; N220 M30 ;

Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough facing cycle:

N110 G72 W0.1 R0.03 ;

Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.

W: Specifies the depth of cut of each pass during the roughing cycle.

R: Specifies the distance the tool will retract from the workpiece for the return pass.

M-289 6-15

Figure 6.6 - G72/G70 Rough/Finish Facing Cycle

TI17882.650

4.100

3.000

4.000

1.250

Start Point

.100

1.000

.750

.95235

.400 .500

U30o

W (N110)

W(N120)

.375

CL

SpindleFace

ChuckFace

Page 106: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Block N120 will execute the rough facing cycle:

N120 G72 P130 Q180 U0.03 W0.015 F0.01 ;

Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area being roughed out.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area being roughed out.

U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle. Thisis a positive diameter value when facing on the front side of the part.

W: Amount of stock in the W direction to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.

F: Feedrate for the roughing passes. The decimal point must be programmed.

Block N130 establishes the CSS value for the G70 finishing cycle:

N130 G0 Z-1.25 S1000 ;

S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.

Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.

N140 G1 G99 X3. F0.004 ;

F: The feedrate for the finishing pass.

Block N190 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying thefirst (P) and the last (Q) blocks of the required program section:

N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;

Where: G70 = Preparatory command for the finishing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that describes the finish con-tour dimensions of the workpiece area being finish machined.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that describes the finish con-tour dimensions of the workpiece area being finish machined.

When the control encounters the second G72 preparatory command block, the amount of fin-ish stock as specified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will movein the direction and distance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) toensure that slide movements occur in the proper direction to leave stock for finishing. If the signis omitted, the control automatically assumes plus (+). In this example, the cross slide will move.015 inches in the +U direction and the carriage will move .015 inches in the +W direction. Thecontrol will then cause the machine to execute multiple roughing passes .1 inches deep and aroughing contour pass (shown by the dashed lines in Figure 6.6) that follows the contour as des-ignated by blocks N130 through N180. After completion of the roughing contour pass, the finishpass will be executed according to the program section specified by the G70 block.

6-16 M-289

Page 107: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word inblock N110 (R0.03).

Tool changes (T function) for the roughing cycle MUST be made prior to the first G72 block.Tool offset changes for the finishing cycle can be made within the blocks designated by the Pand Q words in the G70 block.

Tool Nose Radius Compensation (TNRC) must be established in a block preceding the firstG72 block if roughing and finishing is performed by the same tool. TNRC is activated and inter-polated in the move to the starting point commanded in block N90. TNRC is deactivated at thebeginning of the G72 roughing cycle and reactivated after the G72 roughing cycle is completed.After the workpiece has been finish machined, TNRC is cancelled by the G40 command insubprogram “O1", which is called in block N200. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compensation"Chapter 2.

If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be established in the blocks preceding thefirst G72 block. Feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the G72 blocks orin the second G72 block. If a different surface speed and feedrate is required for the finishingpass, it must be established in the part program after the second G72 block. The Surface speedand feedrate for the finishing pass can be changed at will between the starting and endingblock, as designated by the P and Q words in the G70 block.

- NOTE -It is recommended that the spindle speed be established before the G72 blocks toensure that the spindle reaches the full commanded speed before the roughingpasses begin.

The spindle rotation command (M03, M04, M13, or M14) that must precede entry into CSSmode is programmed in block N30. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word andthe G50 preparatory command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96command in block N80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle by the S word in the sameblock.

Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Feedrate for the finishingpass is established in block N140. CSS is canceled by the G97 command in subprogram “O1"after the workpiece has been finish machined. Also see ”Constant Surface Speed Programming"in Chapter 10.

M-289 6-17

Page 108: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G72 PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain a X move.

2. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.

3. The G72 Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle is not designed to rough out pockets. Thecontouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern.

4. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designated byP and the end of the cycle designated by Q.

5. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. Thecontrol automatically returns the tool to the start point after the block specified by Q is exe-cuted.

6. When rough and finish facing will be performed by the same tool and Tool Nose RadiusCompensation (TNRC) is to be used, TNRC must be programmed prior to the first G72block. TNRC will be deactivated during the G72 cycle and reactivated after the G72 cycleis completed.

7. If Constant Surface Speed (CSS) is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the firstG72 block.

8. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G72 block. Tool off-set changes for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the P andQ words in the G70 block.

9. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the firstG72 block or in the second G72 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishing cy-cle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words.

10. The start point Z Axis value and the end point Z Axis value (Q line pull-off value) must bethe same.

6-18 M-289

Page 109: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G73/G70 ROUGH AND FINISH PATTERN REPEATThe G73 Canned Pattern Repeat Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of re-

peatedly cutting a fixed pattern (contour) with two blocks of information. The first G73 blockspecifies the incremental distance between the first and last roughing pass and the number ofroughing passes to be executed. The second G73 block specifiesthe program blocks that de-scribe the finish contour of the workpiece and the amount of stock to be left for finish machining.Finally, the G70 preparatory command specifies the section of the workpiece to be finish ma-chined by specifying the first and last block of the required program section.

This automatic cycle is especially useful for rough and finish contouring a workpiece whoserough shape has already been created by casting, forging or rough machining. If this cycle is tobe used to contour a workpiece from bar stock, make certain the first pass starts at a point thatwill not cause excessive “hogging” on the first pass.

Figure 6.7 illustrates an elementary part that is to be finished to the dimensions shown withthree roughing passes and a finishing pass.

It is assumed the configuration of the blank workpiece approximates that of the finish piece.

The face of the part extends 2.65 inches from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 setsthe part face to Z0, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.

The X and Z Axis tool offsets are specified through the Tool Offset selection in block N50. Inthe two G73/G70 sample programs Tool Offset #7 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the pro-grammer to program the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spin-dle centerline and the Z Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on themachine coordinate system. If a Z Axis Work Shift (G10) is active, the Z Axis position of the tooltip will be positioned in relation to the shifted Z0.

Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the cor-rect format in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.

- CAUTION -Assuming the X axis workshift is set to zero, the X coordinate values are pro-grammed as POSITIVE values for machining on the front side and NEGATIVEvalues for machining on the back side.

The X dimension of the start point (Block N90) and the X coordinate programmed for the lastblock describing the finish contour of the workpiece must be the same and must be located out-side the maximum diameter occupied by the blank stock. When the cycle is completed, the toolwill rapid back to the start point. This move should be a straight Z Axis move.

M-289 6-19

Page 110: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G73/G70 PATTERN REPEAT CYCLE (Figure 6.7)

N10 G20 ; N120 G73 P130 Q200 U0.03 W0.015 F0.01 ;G65 P9150 H1.5 ; N130 G0 X.5 S1000 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.650 ; N140 G1 G99 Z-0.25 F0.002 ;N7 (Operator Message) ; N150 X0.75 ;N30 G97 M13 ; N160 X1. Z-0.4665 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-0.72 ;N50 T0707 ; N180 X1.5 Z-0.97 ;N60 X2.25 Z0.2 ; N190 Z-1.25 ;N70 G50 S3000 ; N200 X2.18 ;N80 G96 S500 ; N210 G70 P130 Q200 ;N90 G42 X2.18 Z0.1 ; N220 M98 P1 ;N100 G99 ; N230 M1 ;N110 G73 U0.135 W0.05 R3 ; N240 M30 ;

6-20 M-289

Figure 6.7 - G73/G70 Rough & Finish Pattern Repeat

TI1789

Start Point

U1

.5U2

W1

W2

U1 + U2

W1 +W2

Start Point

2.650

2.180

1.250

.500

.7501.000

1.500

.250

.100.4665

.400 .500 .720

.970

2.000 45o

30o

SpindleFace

ChuckFace

CL

U1 = U (N110)U2 = U (N120)W1 = W (N110)W2 = W (N120)

CL

Page 111: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Block N110 will establish the parameters for the G73 rough facing cycle:

N110 G73 U0.135 W0.05 R3 ;

U: Distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction. (radius value) This value tells thecontrol the amount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the X direction afterthe first roughing pass down to the semi-finish size. This value will allow the control to cal-culate the correct distance and direction to pull away from the workpiece before beginningthe automatic cycle. This programmed value is equal to the amount of stock to be removedon a side during the roughing cycle minus the depth of the first cut and finish allowance oneach side.

Example:

Total amount of stock to remove è .200 (radius value)Depth of first cut è -.050 “X axis finish amount left è -.015 ”Programmed U word (Block N110) è .135 “

W: Distance and direction of relief in the Z Axis direction. This value tells the control theamount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the Z direction after the firstroughing pass down to the finish size. This value will allow the control to calculate the cor-rect distance and direction to pull away from the workpiece before beginning the automaticcycle. This programmed value is equal to the amount of stock to be removed during theroughing cycle minus the depth of the first cut and finish allowance.

R: The number of roughing passes to be taken including the initial pass. This value is modaland is not changed until another value is programmed.

Block N120 will execute the G73 rough facing cycle:

N120 G73 P130 Q200 U0.03 W0.015 F0.01 ;

P: Sequence number of the first block for the program section that describes the finish con-tour dimensions of the workpiece area being roughed out.

Q: Sequence number of the last block for the program section that describes the finish con-tour dimensions of the workpiece area being roughed out.

U: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction.This is a positive diameter value when machining on the front side of the part.

W: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.

F: Feedrate to be active during the automatic roughing cycle.

Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.

N140 G1 G99 Z-0.25 F0.002 ;

F: The feedrate for the finishing pass.

M-289 6-21

Page 112: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Block N210 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying thefirst (P) and last (Q) blocks of the required program section.

N210 G70 P130 Q200 ;

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be finish machined.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be finish machined.

- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q datawords.

When the control encounters the second G73 preparatory command block, the amount of fin-ish stock as specified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will movein the direction and distance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) toensure that slide movements occur in the proper direction to leave stock for finishing. If the signis omitted,the control automatically assumes plus (+). In this example the cross slide will move.015 inches in the +U direction and the carriage will move .015 inches in the +W direction. Thecontrol will then cause the machine to execute multiple roughing passes (shown by the dashedlines in Figure 6.7) that follows the contour as designated by blocks N130 through N200. Aftercompletion of the roughing passes, the finish pass will be executed according to the programsection specified in the G70 block.

Tool Nose Radius Compensation (TNRC) must be established in a block preceding the firstG73 block if roughing and finishing is performed by the same tool. TNRC is activated and inter-polated in the move to the starting point commanded in block N90. TNRC is deactivated at thebeginning of the G73 roughing cycle and reactivated after the G73 roughing cycle is completed.After the workpiece has been finish machined, TNRC is cancelled by the G40 command insubprogram “O1", which is called in block N220. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compensation"Chapter 2.

Constant Surface Speed must be established in blocks preceding the G73 roughing cycle.The feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the first G73 block or in thesecond G73 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishing pass must be established inthe part program after the second G73 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishingpass can be changed at will between the starting and ending blocks, as designated by the Pand Q words in the G70 block.

The spindle rotation command (M03, M04, M13, or M14) that must precede entry into CSSmode is programmed in block N30. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word andthe G50 preparatory command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96command in block N80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle is set by the S word in thesame block. A G99 Preparatory command, programmed in block N100, establishes Inch perRevolution feedrate.

Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Feedrate for the finishingpass is established in block N140. CSS is canceled by the G97 command in subprogram “O1"after the workpiece has been finish machined. Also see ”Constant Surface Speed Pro-gramming", in Chapter 10.

6-22 M-289

Page 113: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G73 PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.

2. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designated byP and the end of the cycle designated by Q.

3. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. Thecontrol automatically returns the slides to the start point after the block specified by Q isexecuted.

4. When rough and finish machining will be performed by the same tool and Tool Nose Ra-dius Compensation (TNRC) is to be used, TNRC must be programmed prior to the firstG73 block. TNRC will be deactivated during the G73 cycle and reactivated after the G73cycle is completed.

5. If Constant Surface Speed (CSS) is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the firstG73 block.

6. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G73 block. Tool off-set changes for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the P andQ words in the G70 block.

7. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the firstG73 block or in the second G73 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishing cy-cle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70 block.

8. The amount of pull-off at the end of each roughing pass must be greater than the depth ofcut per pass.

9. The start point X Axis value and the end point X Axis value (Q line pull-off value) must bethe same.

M-289 6-23

Page 114: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

AUTOMATIC FINISHING CYCLE (G70)After rough cutting by G71, G72, or G73, the following command permits finishing:

G70 P(starting block) Q(finishing block) ;

Refer to the sections on the G71, G72, and G73 automatic cycles for G70 programmingexamples.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be finish machined.

Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that describes the finish contourdimensions of the workpiece area to be finish machined.

The following program segment is an example for programming a G70 Finishing Cycle usinga different tool than the roughing cycle.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

N8 (Operator Message) Sequence number and operator message

N340 G97 M13 ; Direct rpm mode, spindle direction and coolant

N350 M98 P1 ; Call safe start/end subprogram O1

N360 T08 X2.25 ; Select tool offset, X axis move

N370 Z.2 ; Z axis move

N380 G50 S3000 ; Spindle rpm limit established

N390 G96 S500 ; Constant surface speed established

N400 G42 X2.18 Z.1 ; TNRC activated in move to start point

N410 G70 P130 Q200 ; Activate G70 finishing cycle, identify blocks that definethe workpiece contour to be finish machined

N420 M98 P1 ; Call safe start/end subprogram O1

N430 M1 ; Optional stop

G70 PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. F, S and T words programmed between sequence numbers “P___” and “Q___”, as definedby the G70 program block will be recognized by the G70 cycle.

2. When the G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle is completed, the tool is returned to the startpoint and the next block is read.

3. Subprograms cannot be called in blocks between the starting block (P word) and finishingblock (Q word), as specified in the G70 block.

6-24 M-289

Page 115: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CONSTANT DEPTH INCREMENT AUTO DRILLING AND GROOVING CYCLESIn any auto drilling or grooving cycle, the axis on which the drilling or grooving cycle is occur-

ring is reversed at prescribed intervals to provide for proper chip removal. These cycles must beflexible enough to accommodate a wide variety of materials and a full range of depths. It is theprogrammer’s responsibility to make certain that the programmed parameters result in a cyclethat satisfactorily removes chips during the machining operation. If a chip load builds up:

1. The tool could break.

2. The spindle could stall.

3. The axis servo motor could overload.

The CHNC® III Chucker and Bar Machine is equipped with two constant increment cycles:

• The G74 Auto Drilling Cycle is used when drilling on the Z axis.

• The G75 Auto Grooving Cycle is used when grooving on the X axis.

G74 AUTO DRILLING CYCLE

The G74 command activates a Z axis automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth incre-ments. All information for the cycle is programmed in two data blocks, as shown below.

Data Block Structure

CHNC III MACHINEInch Programming

G74 R2.4 ;G74 Z(W)±2.4 Q6 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);

Metric ProgrammingG74 R3.3 ;G74 Z(W)±3.3 Q6 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);

CHNC IIISP SUPER-PRECISION® MACHINEInch Programming

G74 R2.5 ;G74 Z(W)±2.5 Q7 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);

Metric ProgrammingG74 R3.4 ;G74 Z(W)±3.4 Q7 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);

- NOTE -The values shown in the preceding data blocks are data word format designations,NOT actual dimensions.

M-289 6-25

Page 116: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Q Word ProgrammingDecimal Point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word. On CHNC® III machines,

the control assumes decimal point placement as Q2.4 for English units (inches) and Q3.3 forMetric units (millimeters). On CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® machines, the control assumes deci-mal point placement as Q2.5 for English units (inches) and Q3.4 for Metric units (millimeters).Leading zeros may be omitted; however trailing zeros MUST be programmed. Refer to the fol-lowing examples:

CHNC III MACHINEEnglish: Q2500 = .25 inches Metric: Q2500 = 2.5 millimeters

Q25000 = 2.50 inches Q25000 = 25.0 millimeters

CHNC IIISP SUPER-PRECISION MACHINEEnglish: Q25000 = .25 inches Metric: Q25000 = 2.5 millimeters

Q250000 = 2.50 inches Q250000 = 25.0 millimeters

Where: G74 = G code for Auto Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)

R = Amount of retract between cutting moves.

Z = Z coordinate of final hole depth (signed)

W = Incremental distance on the Z axis from thestart point to final depth (signed)

Q = Size of depth increment (unsigned)

F = Feedrate

Before the G74 blocks are encountered, the drill must be positioned at the start point. Duringexecution of the cycle, the series of Z-Axis moves (Refer to Figure 6.8) is as follows:

a) From the start point, the drill feeds in “Q” amount.

b) The drill retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.

c) The drill feeds in “Q+R” amount.

d) The drill continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “Q+R” amount until the lastpass. On the last pass, the drill feeds in a distance equal to or less than “Q” until the finalhole depth is reached, then rapid retracts to the start point.

6-26 M-289

Figure 6.8 - G74 Auto Drilling Cycle Parameters

TI2159A

Z-Axis Start Point

W

QR

+Z

Z

CL

Page 117: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G74 Auto Drilling Sample ProgramIn this sample program segment, Z Zero is the face of the part and the final depth of the hole

is 1.5 inches. Refer to Figure 6.9 .

Sample Program Segment:N7 (Operator Message) ; N270 G74 R0.02 ;N230 G97 S1000 M13 ; N280 G74 G99 Z-1.5 Q25000 F0.005 ;N240 M98 P1 ; N290 M98 P1 ;N250 T0707 ; N300 M1 ;N260 X0. Z0.1 ;

R WORD (N270):

Specifies the amount of retract between each cutting move of the drill bit. Refer to “R”, inFigure 6.15 . In this example, the amount of retract is .02 inches.

F WORD (N280):

Specifies the feedrate for the G74 Auto Drilling Cycle. In this example, the feedrate is .005inches per revolution.

Q WORD (N280):

Specifies the depth of each cutting pass in the Z direction. In this example, the depth of cutis .25 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.

Z WORD (N280):

Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to Z Zero. In this example, the finaldepth of the drilled hole is 1.5 inches.

- NOTE -Instead of programming Z-1.5 in block N280, we could have programmed W-1.6(the incremental distance from the start point to the final hole depth) and the cyclewould have been executed the same way.

M-289 6-27

Figure 6.9 - G74 Auto Drilling Cycle(Sample Workpiece)

Start Point(X0. Z.1)

.250

1.600

1.500 .100

.020

CL

TI2160B

Page 118: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G75 AUTO GROOVING CYCLE

All information for the G75 Auto Grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks, as shownbelow.

Data Block Structure

CHNC® III MACHINEInch Programming

G75 R2.4 ;G75 X(U)±2.4 Z(W)±2.4 P6 Q6 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);

Metric ProgrammingG75 R3.3 ;G75 X(U)±3.3 Z(W)±3.3 P6 Q6 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);

CHNC IIISP SUPER-PRECISION® MACHINEInch Programming

G75 R2.5 ;G75 X(U)±2.5 Z(W)±2.5 P7 Q7 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);

Metric ProgrammingG75 R3.4 ;G75 X(U)±3.4 Z(W)±3.4 P7 Q7 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);

- NOTE -The values shown in the preceding data blocks are data word format designations,NOT actual dimensions.

Where: G75 = G code for Auto Grooving Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)

R = Amount of retract between cutting moves.

X = X coordinate at full depth of pass (signed)

U = Incremental distance from X axis start pointto X axis final position (signed)

Z = Z axis position for final pass (signed)

W = Incremental distance from first pass Z axis positionto last pass Z axis position (signed)

P = Size of depth increment (unsigned)

Q = Incremental amount of Z axis move between fullcutting passes (unsigned)

F = Feedrate.

Refer to Figure 6.10 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.

6-28 M-289

Page 119: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M-289 6-29

Figure 6.10 - G75 Auto Grooving Cycle Parameters

U

W

Start Point

(X,Z)

1Z0

2

P

R

3

4

U

5

U

6

Q

TI2164A

Z AxisMovement

CL CL

CL CL

CL CL

Page 120: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

P and Q Word ProgrammingDecimal Point programming is NOT allowed with the P or Q data words. On CHNC® III ma-

chines, the control assumes decimal point placement as: P2.4 and Q2.4 for English units(inches), P3.3 and Q3.3 for Metric units (millimeters). On CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® ma-chines, the control assumes decimal point placement as: P2.5 and Q2.5 for English units(inches), P3.4 and Q3.4 for Metric units (millimeters). Leading zeros may be omitted; howevertrailing zeros MUST be programmed. Refer to the following examples:

CHNC III MACHINEEnglish: P2500 = .25 inches Metric: P2500 = 2.5 millimeters

P25000 = 2.50 inches P25000 = 25.0 millimeters

English: Q2500 = .25 inches Metric: Q2500 = 2.5 millimetersQ25000 = 2.50 inches Q25000 = 25.0 millimeters

CHNC IIISP SUPER-PRECISION MACHINEEnglish: P25000 = .25 inches Metric: P25000 = 2.5 millimeters

P250000 = 2.50 inches P250000 = 25.0 millimeters

English: Q25000 = .25 inches Metric: Q25000 = 2.5 millimetersQ250000 = 2.50 inches Q250000 = 25.0 millimeters

Tool Movement SequenceBefore the G75 blocks are encountered, the grooving tool must be positioned at the X and Z

axis start point. During execution of the cycle, the series of X and Z axis moves (Refer to Figure6.10) is as follows:

a) From the start point, the tool feeds in “P” amount.

b) The tool retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.

c) The tool feeds in “P+R” amount.

d) The tool continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “P+R” amount until the lastpass. On the last pass, the tool feeds in a distance equal to or less than “P” until the finaldepth is reached.

e) The tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position.

f) The tool moves toward the Z axis end point a distance specified by the Q word to arrive atthe start point for the next full cut.

g) Steps “a” through “f” are repeated until the entire groove is completed.

h) When the final cut is completed, the tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position; then rap-ids to the X and Z axis start point specified by the program blocks immediately precedingthe G75 blocks.

6-30 M-289

Page 121: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G75 Auto Grooving Sample ProgramIn this sample program segment, X Zero is the spindle centerline, Z Zero is the face of the

workpiece and the final depth of the groove is .25 inches. The width of the grooving tool is .125inches. Refer to Figure 6.11 .

- NOTE -The P word in block N300 is an incremental value. Each cutting pass will be an ac-tual .075 inch cut.

Sample Program Segment:N7 (Operator Message) ; N280 G96 S280N230 G97 M13 ; N290 G75 R0.02 ;N240 M98 P1 ; N300 G75 G99 X-0.5 Z-0.8 P07500 Q10000 F0.005 ;N250 T0707 ; N310 M98 P1 ;N260 X-1.1 Z-0.625 ; N320 M1 ;N270 G50 S5200 ;

R WORD (N290):

Specifies the incremental amount of retract between each cutting move of the groovingtool. Refer to “R”, in Figure 6.10 . In this example, the amount of retract is .02 inches.

F WORD (N300):

Specifies the feedrate for the G75 Auto Grooving Cycle. In this example, the feedrate is.005 inches per revolution.

M-289 6-31

Figure 6.11 - G75 Auto Grooving Cycle(Sample Workpiece)

TI2165

-X

+Z

.800

.500

.625.250

.500 DIA.1.000 DIA.

1.100 DIA.

CL

Start Point(X-1.1 Z-.625)

Page 122: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

P WORD (N300):

Specifies the incremental depth of each cutting move in the X direction. In this example,the depth of each cutting move is .075 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT allowedwith the P word.

Q WORD (N300):

Specifies the incremental move in the Z direction between each full cutting pass. In this ex-ample, the incremental move is .100 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT allowedwith the Q word.

X WORD (N300):

Specifies the X axis position of the tool at the end of each complete cutting pass, in refer-ence to X Zero. In this example, the X axis position is X-0.5 inches.

Z WORD (N300):

Specifies the Z axis position for the final full cutting pass, in reference to Z Zero. In this ex-ample, the final Z axis position is Z-0.8 inches.

- NOTE -If the Z values in blocks N260 and N300 are swapped, the tool will begin at Z-0.8and finish at Z-0.625 .

6-32 M-289

Page 123: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

VARIABLE DEPTH INCREMENT AUTO DRILLING CYCLEThe G74 Auto Drilling Cycle has limited applications because of its constant infeed, constant

retract increments, and absence of a dwell. To create a more powerful auto drilling cycle,Hardinge Inc. has made use of the Macro B programming feature to develop an auto drilling cy-cle with variable depth increments, a retract point clear of the part, and a programmable dwell atthe retract point.

All information required for this drilling cycle is programmed in one data block.

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word format designations,NOT actual dimensions.

Decimal point programming MUST be used in data blocks containing macro calls.

BLOCK FORMAT

CHNC® III MachineInch Format: G65 P9136 K±2.4 B2.4 F1.5 W2.4 C2.4 A5.1 ;

Metric Format: G65 P9136 K±3.3 B3.3 F3.3 W3.3 C3.3 A5.1 ;

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® MachineInch Format: G65 P9136 K±2.5 B2.5 F1.6 W2.5 C2.5 A5.1 ;

Metric Format: G65 P9136 K±3.4 B3.4 F3.4 W3.4 C3.4 A5.1 ;

Where: G65 = G Code for Macro CallP9136 = Macro Program 9136 (Deep Drill)

K = Z Axis End Position (SIGNED absolute value)B = Start Feed Increment Value (Incremental value, always positive)F = Drill Feedrate per Revolution

W = Depth of First Drill In-FeedC = Minimum IncrementA = Amount of Dwell (in seconds) at Retract Point

Refer to Figure 6.12 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.

M-289 6-33

Page 124: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

POSITIONING THE DRILL

The data block preceding the block calling Deep Drill Macro Program 9136 will position thedrill tip at the start point for the drilling cycle. All retract motion during the drilling cycle will be tothis start point.

CALCULATING THE DRILL PASS INCREMENTS

1. 1st Pass Increment = Specified by the W word.

2. 2nd pass increment = .5 times the 1st pass increment.

3. 3rd pass increment = .5 times the 2nd pass increment.

4. 4th pass increment = .5 times the 3rd pass increment.

The control will not allow the pass increment to drop below the minimum pass increment, asestablished by the C word.

- NOTE -If desired, the value of “W” can be increased or decreased to lengthen or shortenthe first pass depth. This will have a direct affect on the rest of the passes.

6-34 M-289

Figure 6.12 - Macro 9136: Deep Drill Cycle Parameters

TI2163

Z Start Position

MIN.INC.

MIN.INC.

3rd 2nd 1st Pass (W)

K

Z EndPosition

B

Feed

Rapid Traverse

Page 125: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

EXAMPLE 1 (Refer to Figure 6.13)

Deep Drill Macro Program 9136

A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep, is to be drilled in a piece of 1316 inch diameter

stock. The depth of the first pass is to be .75 inches. A one-half second dwell is pro-grammed at the retract position. The start feed increment will be set to .02 inches and theminimum increment will be set to .0625 inches. We will assume that the face of theworkpiece has been set to Z Zero and the part has already been center drilled. The part pro-gram block for the deep drilling cycle will be as follows:

G65 P9136 K-1.5 B0.02 F0.008 W0.75 C0.0625 A0.5 ;

Sample Program Segment:

.

.N150 M98 P1 ;N160 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 ;N180 M98 P1 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z0.1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B0.02 F0.008 W0.75 C0.0625 A0.5 ;N220 M98 P1 ;N230 M1 ;..

M-289 6-35

Figure 6.13 - Macro Program 9136(Without using Optional Z Word)

TI2166

.100

.020.730

.750

1.500

Z0

CL

Start Point(X0. Z.1)

First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z.02)Second Rapid-to-Feed

Point (X0. Z-.73)

Page 126: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

OPTIONAL Z WORD

- CAUTION -The Z word is an optional command and is NOT TO BE PROGRAMMED UNLESSREQUIRED.

Assuming the part face has been set to Z0, a Z word with a negative (-) value may be pro-grammed if the drill is to start inside the workpiece; for example, inside a counterbore.

The depth of the counterbore will be programmed in the macro command line as a negativevalue, assuming the face of the workpiece is set to Z0. The drill will rapid into the counterbore adistance equal to the value of the Z word plus the value of the B word. The drill will feed in fromthis position at the programmed feedrate.

Refer to “Example 2", below.

EXAMPLE 2 (Refer to Figure 6.14)

Deep Drill Macro Program 9136 (With a Z Word)

A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep from the face of the workpiece, is to be drilledin a piece of 13

16 inch diameter stock. The hole will begin at the base of a .25 inchcounterbore. The depth of the first pass is to be .75 inches. A one-half second dwell is pro-grammed at the retract position. The start feed increment will be set to .02 inches and theminimum increment will be set to .0625 inches. We will assume that the face of theworkpiece has been set to Z Zero and the bottom of the counterbore has already been cen-ter drilled. The part program block for the deep drilling cycle will be as follows:

G65 P9136 K-1.5 B0.02 F0.008 W0.75 C0.0625 A0.5 Z-0.25 ;

6-36 M-289

Figure 6.14 - Macro Program 9136(using the Optional Z Word)

TI2174

1.500

1.000

.980

.750

.100

.250

.020

Z0

CL

Start Point(X0. Z.1)

First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z-.23)Second Rapid-to-Feed

Point (X0. Z-.98)

Page 127: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

The only difference between this sample program segment and the sample program segmentin Example 1 is that in this sample the drill bit will rapid from the start point (X0.0 Z0.1) to X0.Z-0.23 before going to the programmed feedrate.

The coordinate location X0. Z-0.23 was determined by adding the Feed Increment Value (Bword) to the value of the programmed Z word.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.N150 M98 P1 ;N160 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 ;N180 M98 P1 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z0.1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B0.02 F0.008 W0.75 C0.0625 A0.5 Z-0.25 ;N220 M98 P1 ;N230 M1 ;..

M-289 6-37

Page 128: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

6-38 M-289

Page 129: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLES

FEEDRATEThe feedrate for precision threading should be limited to a maximum of 120 in/min [3048mm].

Above this value, to the maximum programmable feedrate of 400 in/min [10160 mm/min] on theX axis and Z axis, the lead error should be checked to make certain it does not exceed specifi-cations for the thread being produced. It is the programmer’s responsibility to ensure that thecombination of lead and spindle speed does not exceed a feedrate which produces threads thatare not within specifications.

The following chart shows the maximum lead in inches that can be cut with a given spindlespeed without exceeding the maximum recommended feedrate of 120 in/min [3048 mm/min].Figures are derived from the formulas:

LEAD (IPR) = 120 IPM ÷ RPM

LEAD (MMPR) = 3048 MMPM ÷ RPM

SPINDLERPM

MAXIMUM LEAD

Inches Millimeters

50 2.400000 60.9600

100 1.200000 30.4800

150 .800000 20.3200

200 .600000 15.2400

300 .400000 10.1600

500 .240000 6.0960

750 .160000 4.0640

1000 .120000 3.0480

1500 .080000 2.0320

2000 .060000 1.5240

2500 .048000 1.2192

3000 .040000 1.0160

3500 .034285 .8708

4000 .030000 .7620

4500 .026666 .6773

5000 .024000 .6096

M-289 7-1

Page 130: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

SINGLE BLOCK THREADCUTTINGThe CHNC® III Chucker and Bar Machine equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T control features

an accurate encoder which is geared to the spindle through a timing belt. The encoder monitorsRPM during a threading pass and when feeding in inches/millimeters per revolution (G99). Theencoder sends data controlling carriage and cross slide velocity, as determined by the X and Zdistance commands, to the servo motors.

With the Single Block Threadcutting feature, the programmer can cut a thread in any desirednumber of passes using either the G32 or G92 preparatory command. The principle differencesbetween the two commands are:

1. The G92 command controls X and Z axis movement to cause the threading tool to executea box pattern. These X and Z axis movements are controlled by machine parameters dur-ing the threading cycle. The boundaries of this movement are defined by the data in theG92 block and the blocks for the subsequent threading passes.

The G32 command is used to program each threading pass individually.

2. The G92 command requires fewer blocks of information than the G32 command for a com-plete threading operation.

The feedrate of the carriage and/or cross slide is determined by programming the thread“Lead” using the F word address. The format for F is:

Inch Programming: F1.6

Metric Programming: F3.4

- NOTE -Pitch of a thread is the axial distance from the center of one thread to the center ofthe next thread. Lead is the distance the screw will advance when turned one revo-lution. On a single thread screw, the pitch and lead are equal since a screw willadvance an amount equal to the pitch when turned one revolution. On a doublethread the screw will advance two threads or twice the pitch in one revolution.Therefore, the programmed lead is twice the pitch.

Program the spindle speed for a threading operation in a block of data preceding thethread-cutting calling block (G32 or G92). This will allow time for the spindle speed to stabilizebefore entering the threadcutting mode.

- CAUTION -When the % Feedrate / % Rapid Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion WILLSTOP.

The % Feedrate / % Rapid Override switch is not active during a G32 or G92 threadcuttingpass unless it is set to 0%.

The SPDL DEC (Spindle Decrease) and SPDL INC (Spindle Increase) push buttons are ac-tive during a G32 or G92 threadcutting pass.

Unless the control has the optional Thread Cutting Cycle Retract feature, FEED HOLD is notactive during the threadcutting pass, but is active on the return pass.

7-2 M-289

Page 131: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TO ESTABLISH A START POINT FOR THREADING

For accurate thread leads it is essential that the per revolution feedrate of the tool is held con-stant during the threading pass. Location of the start point for each threading pass is importantin that sufficient distance must be provided to accelerate the tool from its Z axis velocity at theend of the infeed to the proper threading velocity.

Due to the nature of the servo-controlled axis drive system, provide a minimum of four leadsor .250 inch [6.5mm], whichever distance is greater, between the first thread to be cut and thestart point for the threading pass.

- NOTE -This minimum clearance must be provided for all threading passes. If a compoundinfeed is used, (see “Plunge and Compound Infeed Threading”, page 7-8) workbackwards to calculate the start point for the cycle. Beginning with the last thread-ing pass, calculate the Z axis motion during infeed for the first pass. Add this dis-tance to the Z axis clearance [four leads or .250 inch (6.5mm), whichever isgreater]. This gives the Z axis position of the start point for the cycle relative to thefirst thread to be cut.

M-289 7-3

Page 132: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G32 CONSTANT LEAD THREADCUTTINGThe G32 command, which must be programmed in each threadcutting data block, automati-

cally synchronizes the threadcutting mode so that the same thread is cut in each pass. The G32command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.

Only one axis need be programmed for a straight thread; both axes must be programmed fora tapered thread. The thread length and lead must be programmed in each G32 block.

Compound or plunge infeed may be used with G32 programming. Refer to page 7-8 for infor-mation on infeeding.

G32 STRAIGHT THREADING (Figure 7.1)

For this example it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and isready to have a .0625 pitch, single lead, .750 inch long thread cut on its O.D.

The work shift offset is used to set the face of the part to Z0. All threading passes will there-fore be in the minus Z direction. The spindle centerline is X0.

Sample Program:N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N450 G0 X0.951 ;N350 G97 S1920 M13 ; N460 Z0.25 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X0.8176 F50. ;N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 Z-0.75 F0.0625 ;N380 X0.951 Z0.25 ; N490 G0 X0.951 ;N390 G1 X0.8559 F50. ; N500 Z0.25 ;N400 G32 Z-0.75 F0.0625 ; N510 G1 X0.7984 F50. ;N410 G0 X0.951 ; N520 G32 Z-0.75 F0.0625 ;N420 Z0.25 ; N530 G0 X0.951 ;N430 G1 X0.8367 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;N440 G32 Z-0.75 F0.0625 ; N550 M1 ;

7-4 M-289

Figure 7.1 - G32 Straight Threading

TI1791

.7500

.875

.0383Lead.0625

.250

Z Zero

1

2

CL.7984

Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383"

Page 133: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G32 TAPERED THREADING (Figure 7.2)

When programming tapered threads, movements must be programmed in both the X and Zaxes. The lead is specified by the F word, whose lead orientation (X or Z axis) is determined bythe angle of the taper with the part centerline.

If the angle of taper “A”, Figure 7.2, is less than or equal to 45 degrees with the part center-line, the value of F is measured parallel to the Z axis. If angle of the taper is greater than 45 de-grees, F is measured parallel to the X axis.

For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree47 minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 pitch, single lead thread .8 inches long turnedon its O.D. The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis because the angle of taperis less than 45 degrees.

The work shift offset is used to set the face of the part to Z0. All threading passes will there-fore be in the minus Z direction. The spindle centerline is X0.

Sample Program:N7 (T0707 3/4 - 14 PIPE THREAD) ; N450 G0 X1.164 ;N350 G97 S1680 M13 ; N460 Z0.3 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X0.8915 F50. ;N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 X0.96 Z-0.8 F0.071429 ;N380 X1.164 Z0.3 ; N490 G0 X1.164 ;N390 G1 X0.9515 F50. ; N500 Z0.3 ;N400 G32 X1.02 Z-0.8 F0.071429 ; N510 G1 X0.8672 F50. ;N410 G0 X1.164 ; N520 G32 X0.9357 Z-0.8 F0.071429 ;N420 Z0.3 ; N530 G0 X1.164 ;N430 G1 X0.9215 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;N440 G32 X0.99 Z-0.8 F0.071429 ; N550 M1 ;

M-289 7-5

Figure 7.2 - G32 Tapered Threading

TI1792

.800

1.164

1.050

.0343

LeaD.071429

Z Start.300

.9814

Z Zero

1

2

A

Single Depth of Thread= .8 x Lead = .05715"Angle = 1° 47’

CL

Page 134: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G92 CANNED THREADING CYCLEThe G92 Threadcutting command provides the programmer with the capability to define multi-

ple threading passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The G92 lead and threadlength commands are programmed in the first threadcutting data block only. Only positions inthe X (U) axis (thread depth) need be programmed in subsequent blocks. The G92 command ismodal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.

Plunge infeed must be used with G92 programming. Refer to page 7-8 for information oninfeeding.

When cutting a tapered thread, an R word must be programmed in the G92 block.

The following sample programs have been shortened for easier reading.

G92 STRAIGHT THREADING (Figure 7.3)

(Constant lead on a part having a uniform diameter.)

For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and isready to have a .0625 pitch, single lead, .7500 inch long thread cut on its O.D.

The face of the part extends 2.25 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored inthe Work Shift offset as a negative value. This causes the face of the part to be set to Z0. Allthreading passes will be in the minus Z direction.

The tool nose reference point is .25 inches from the tool slide reference position in the -X di-rection and 1.25 inches from the face of the tool slide in the -Z direction. These dimensions arestored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file under offset 07 as positive values. The offset is acti-vated by the T0707 command in block N370.

Sample Program:N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N400 X0.8367 ;N350 G97 S1920 M13 ; N410 X0.8176 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N420 X0.7984 ;N370 T0707; N430 G1 ;N380 X0.951 Z0.25 ; N440 M98 P1 ;N390 G92 X0.8559 Z-0.75 F0.0625 ; N450 M1 ;

7-6 M-289

Figure 7.3 - G92 Straight ThreadingTI1793

Start Point

.951

.875

.0383 .7984

.250

Lead.0625

.7500

Return Path

Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383"

CL

Page 135: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point estab-lishes the return path after the completion of each threading pass.

Block N390 establishes G92 threading, the X coordinate for the first pass (X.8559), threadlength (Z-.75) and lead (F.0625). In subsequent blocks, N400 through N420, it is only necessaryto program the X coordinate for each pass until the final depth is reached in block N420.

- NOTE -A G1 code MUST be on the line after the last threading pass. If the G1 code is notpresent, the tool will make two extra passes on the workpiece at the last pro-grammed thread depth.

G92 TAPERED THREADING (Figure 7.4)

(Constant lead on a part having a tapered diameter.)

O.D. tapered threads are programmed as a negative R word in the G92 block to define theamount of taper. I.D. tapered threads are programmed with a positive R word in the G92 block.

For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree47 minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 pitch, single lead, .8 inch long thread turned onits O.D. The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis and R is measured parallel tothe X axis because the angle of the taper is less than 45 degrees.

The face of the part extends 2.25 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored inthe Work Shift offset as a negative value. Storing the part length as a Work Shift offset causesthe face of the part to be set to Z0. All threadcutting passes will be in the minus Z direction.

Sample Program:N7 (T0707 3/4 - 14 PIPE THREAD) ; N410 X0.99 ;N350 G97 S1680 M13 ; N420 X0.97 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N430 X0.95 ;N370 T0707 ; N440 X0.9357 ;N380 X1.164 Z0.3 ; N450 G1 ;N390 G92 X1.03 Z-0.8 F0.071429 R-0.0343 ; N460 M98 P1 ;N400 X1.01 ; N470 M1 ;

M-289 7-7

Figure 7.4 - G92 Tapered Threading

TI1794

Start Point

1.164

1.050

.0343.05715

Lead.071429

.300

.9814

B

CL

.800

.071429

X

Z Zero

Single Depth of Thread= .8 x Lead = .05715"Angle = 1° 47’Taper (R) = .0343"

Page 136: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

The tool nose reference point is .25 inches from the tool slide reference position in the -X di-rection and 1.25 inches from the face of the tool slide in the -Z direction. These dimensions arestored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file under offset 07 as positive values. The offset is acti-vated by the T0707 command in block N370.

Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point estab-lishes the return path after completion of each threading pass.

Block N390 establishes the threading mode, the X coordinate for the first pass (X1.03), threadlength (Z-0.8), lead (F.071429), and amount of taper (R-.0343). In subsequent blocks, N400through N440, it is only necessary to program the X coordinate for each pass until the finalthread depth is reached in block N440. Notice that the sign of R must be negative to cause thethreading tool to move in the positive X direction.

See “R Word” in MULTIPLE REPETITIVE THREADING CYCLE (G76), page 7-17.

If angle of taper “B” is less than or equal to 45 degrees, the value of F is measured parallel tothe Z axis. If the angle of taper is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel to the X axis.

PLUNGE AND COMPOUND INFEED THREADINGPLUNGE INFEED THREADING

A plunge infeed is used in the threading example shown in Figure 7.1 . During a plungeinfeed, Figure 7.5, the tool moves along the X axis from the start point for the threading cycle tothe start point for the current threading pass. Infeed is at 90 degrees relative to the spindle cen-terline. The next block contains the threading G Code (G32) which synchronizes axis motionwith spindle rotation. When the spindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins at the com-manded per revolution feedrate. As illustrated in Figure 7.5, an equal amount of material is re-moved by each edge of the tool.

7-8 M-289

Figure 7.5 - Plunge Infeed

TI1795Start Point

4321

Page 137: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

COMPOUND INFEED THREADING

When machining a material that presents threading difficulties due to its toughness or whencutting a coarse thread of extreme depth, it is often desirable to infeed the tool so that the lead-ing edge of the tool cuts the major portion of the material. This reduces deformation of the toolnose due to pressure and heat thus adding to the tool life. To accomplish this, the Z axis posi-tion of the tool at the start point of each pass is altered by infeeding both the X and Z axes toproduce an infeed angle. This is known as Compound Infeed.

During a compound infeed, Figure 7.6, the tool moves along the X and Z axes from the startpoint for the threading cycle to the start point for the current threading pass. For example, ifinfeed is at a 27.5 degree angle relative to the face of the part, axis travel during infeed is as fol-lows: Let X equal the distance traveled along the X axis during the infeed. The correspondingdistance traveled along the Z axis is equal to X Tan 27.5 degrees.

As in the case with plunge infeed, the block following the compound infeed block contains thethreading G Code. When the spindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins. With a compoundinfeed, the Z axis position of the tool, at the start of each cut, is closer to the part face than itwas on the previous pass. The distance that it is closer is equal to X tan q (where X equals theinfeed increment in the X axis and q equals the compound infeed angle). This causes the major-ity of all metal removal to take place along the leading edge of the tool, with the trailing edgemaking a slight clean-up cut. This is illustrated in Figure 7.6 .

M-289 7-9

Figure 7.6 - Compound Infeed

TI1796

Start Point

12

34

Page 138: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Figure 7.7 illustrates how the Z Start Position for the compound infeed is calculated for eachthreading pass.

Where:

X1 = The Incremental Distance from the Start Point to the X Cut Position for the 1st Pass.

X2 = The Incremental Distance from the Start Point to the X Cut Position for the 2nd Pass.

X3 = The Incremental Distance from the Start Point to the X Cut Position for the 3rd Pass.

Xn = The Incremental Distance from the Start Point to the X Cut Position for the Last Pass.

θ = 27.5 Degrees

Z1 = X1 Tan 27.5 Degrees

Z2 = X2 Tan 27.5 Degrees

Z3 = X3 Tan 27.5 Degrees

Zn = Xn Tan 27.5 Degrees

- NOTE -For machines set up for diameter programming, X1, X2, X3, ..., Xn are only used tocalculate the values for Z1, Z2, Z3, ... Zn. The actual X cut position MUST be pro-grammed as a diameter.

7-10 M-289

Figure 7.7 - Z Start Position for Compound Infeed

TI1797

THREAD LENGTH .2500 Minimum

θ

Z1

Z2

Z3

Zn

X1X2

X3Xn

CL

Page 139: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G76 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE THREADING CYCLEThe G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of

defining a complete threading operation with two blocks of information. The control will interpretthe data in these two blocks and generate the multiple passes required to cut an entire thread.

This automatic threading cycle can be used for cutting straight or tapered threads of constantlead in either Absolute or Incremental mode. The thread may be either external or internal.Plunge (X axis) or compound (X and Z axis) infeed can be performed.

- CAUTION -When the % Feedrate / % Rapid Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion WILLSTOP.

The % Feedrate / % Rapid Override switch is disabled during a G76 Automatic Threading Cy-cle unless it is set to 0%.

Specification of the threading cycle parameters is achieved by using the G76 preparatorycommand and its associated parameters as follows:

DATA BLOCK STRUCTURE

CHNC® III MachineInch Programming:

G76 P6 Q4 R0.4 ;G76 X(U)±2.4 Z(W)±2.4 R±1.4 P4 Q4 F1.6 ;

Metric Programming:G76 P6 Q3 R1.3 ;G76 X(U)±3.3 Z(W)±3.3 R±2.3 P3 Q3 F3.4 ;

CHNC IIISP Super-Precision® MachineInch Programming:

G76 P6 Q5 R0.5 ;G76 X(U)±2.5 Z(W)±2.5 R±1.5 P5 Q5 F1.6 ;

Metric Programming:G76 P6 Q4 R1.3 ;G76 X(U)±3.4 Z(W)±3.4 R±2.4 P4 Q4 F3.4 ;

(Continued on next page)

M-289 7-11

Page 140: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P or Q wordsin a G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle.

When programming the P and Q words in the G76 program blocks, the decimal point is notprogrammed. Leading zeros can be omitted, but all trailing zeros must be programmed.

The number associated with the P word in the first G76 block, as shown on page 7-11, in-dicates the maximum number of digits which may be programmed. No decimal point is im-plied. Refer to page 7-15 for information on this data word.

The numbers associated with the Q word in the first G76 block and the P and Q words inthe second G76 block, as shown on page 7-11, indicate the number of places to the rightof the assumed decimal point.

The control counts from right to left, inserts the decimal point the number of places fromthe right as set by the format. Leading zeros will be automatically inserted when required.

Refer to page 7-3 for information for calculating the Z axis coordinate for the start point of thethreading passes.

7-12 M-289

Page 141: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G76 STRAIGHT THREADING (Figure 7.8)

(Constant lead on a part having a uniform diameter.)

For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and isready to have a .05 pitch, single lead thread, 1.25 inches long cut on its O.D.

The X axis coordinate for the start point (Block N230) is located outside the major diameter ofthe thread a distance equal to the single depth of thread:

X Axis Start Point Coordinate = .5 inch + [2 x .03067] = .56134

In this sample program, the Z axis coordinate for the start point is programmed at Z0.25 .

Sample Program:

N4 (T0404 1/2 - 20 THREAD) ;

N200 G97 S2400 M13 ;

N210 M98 P1 ;

N220 T0404 ;

N230 X0.56134 Z0.25 ;

N240 G76 P011055 Q00150 R.0004 ;

N250 G76 X0.43866 Z-1.25 P03067 Q01160 F0.05 ;

N260 M98 P1 ;

N270 M1 ;

M-289 7-13

Figure 7.8 - Sample G76 Straight Threading ProgramTI1798

Start PointX.56134 Z.25

X.43866

W-1.50

Z-1.25Q.0116

U/2

P.03067F.05

60o

CL.50

Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .03067

Page 142: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G76 TAPERED THREADING (Figure 7.9)

(Constant lead on a tapered part.)

For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required taper and isready to have a .071429 pitch, single lead thread, .5 inch long cut on its O.D.

The X axis coordinate for the start point (Block N230) is located outside the major diameter ofthe thread a distance equal to the single depth of thread:

X Axis Start Point Coordinate = 1.05 inch + [2 x .05715] = 1.16429

In this sample program, the Z axis coordinate for the start point is programmed at Z0.3 .

Sample Program:

N4 (T0404 3/4 - 14 PIPE THREAD) ;

N200 G97 S1100 M13 ;

N210 M98 P1 ;

N220 T0404 ;

N230 X1.16429 Z0.3 ;

N240 G76 P011055 Q00150 R.0004 ;

N250 G76 X0.9375 Z-0.5 P05715 Q01200 R-.02491 F0.071429 ;

N260 M98 P1 ;

N270 M1 ;

7-14 M-289

Figure 7.9 - G76 Threading Parameters: Tapered Thread

TI1799

Start Point

F

Z

W

R

X

PQ

CL

U

TOOLTIP ANGLE

ANGLE “B”

Angle “B” = 1° 47"

Thread Lead “F” = .071429

Single Depth of Tapered Thread “P”= .8 x Lead = .05715

O.D. = 1.050

Length of Thread = .50

Start Point Coordinates = X1.16429 Z0.3

Page 143: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G76 PARAMETER LINE (Figures 7.8 and 7.9)

P Word (First G76 Block):

The number of finishing passes is specified by parameter 5142 and has a valid range from1 to 99. This parameter is set by the first two digits in the P word located in the first G76programming block.

The thread anticipated pull-out amount is specified by parameter 5130 and has a validrange from 00 to 99. This range allows the programmer to specify an anticipated pull-outamount from 0.0 times the thread lead to 9.9 times the thread lead. This parameter is setby the second two digits in the P word located in the first G76 programming block.

The tool infeed angle is specified by parameter 5143 and can be set to 00, 29, 30, 55, 60,or 80 degrees. This parameter is set by the last two digits in the P word located in the firstG76 programming block. The actual infeed angle is half the programmed value.

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P word.

The structure for the P word in the first G76 block is shown on page 7-11.

Q Word (First G76 Block):

Parameter 5140 specifies the minimum depth of cut for a threading pass and is set by thisdata word.

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.

The structure for the Q word in the first G76 block is shown on page 7-11.

R Word (First G76 Block):

Parameter 5141 specifies the finish pass allowance per side and is set by this data word.In the sample programs accompanying Figures 7.8 and 7.9, R.0004 will leave .0004 inchesper side for the clean-up pass.

G76 EXECUTION LINE (Figures 7.8 and 7.9)

P Word (Second G76 Block):

Specifies the single depth of the thread and is always positive. It is measured parallel tothe X axis.

The value for a straight thread is calculated as follows:

Single Depth of O.D. Thread = .61343 x Thread LeadSingle Depth of I.D. Thread = .54127 x Thread Lead

The value for a tapered thread is calculated as follows:

Single Depth of Thread = .8 x Thread Lead

See Figure 7.8 for the P word definition (second G76 block) when cutting a straight threadand Figure 7.9 when cutting a tapered thread.

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P data word.

The structure for the P word in the second G76 block is shown on page 7-11.

M-289 7-15

Page 144: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Q Word (Second G76 Block):

Specifies the cutting depth of the first pass and is always positive. It is measured parallel tothe X axis.

See Figure 7.8 for its definition when cutting a straight thread and Figure 7.9 when cuttinga tapered thread. This value is calculated by dividing the Single Depth of Thread by thesquare root of the number of threading passes to be taken.

- NOTE -When calculating the number of threading passes, round the calculated number upor down to a whole number.

The number of threading passes is calculated as follows:

Inch Thread = (72 x Lead) + 4Metric Thread = (2.8 x Lead) + 4

Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word.

The structure for the Q word in the second G76 block is shown on page 7-11.

F Word (Second G76 Block):

Specifies the thread lead and is always positive. It is measured parallel to the Z axis forstraight threads. It is measured parallel to the Z axis for tapered threads when the angle oftaper with the workpiece centerline is equal to or less than 45 degrees. If the angle of taperwith the workpiece centerline is greater than 45 degrees, it is measured parallel to the Xaxis.

The F word for thread lead has a data word format of 1.6 in Inch mode and 3.4 in Metricmode.

U Word (Second G76 Block):

When a U word is used instead of an X word on an external straight thread, it designatesthe total incremental distance, as a diameter value, parallel to the X axis from the startpoint of the threading operation to the final depth of the thread. For an internal straightthread it designates the incremental distance, as a diameter value, parallel to the X axisfrom the start point of the thread to the thread O.D. For an external tapered thread it desig-nates the total incremental distance, as a diameter value, parallel to the X axis from thestart point to the root diameter of the thread at the large end, and for an internal taperedthread it designates the incremental distance, as a diameter value, parallel to the X axisfrom the start point to the major diameter of the thread at the smallest end. The sign will benegative (-) for internal threads cut on the back side of the spindle centerline and externalthreads cut on the front side of the spindle centerline. The sign will be positive (+) for ex-ternal threads cut on the back side of the spindle centerline and internal threads cut on thefront side of the spindle centerline.

W Word (Second G76 Block):

When a W word is used instead of a Z word on a thread, it specifies the total incrementalthread length measured from the start point. It is measured parallel to the Z axis. The signis negative (-) when cutting from the start point towards the spindle and positive (+) whencutting from the start point away from the spindle.

7-16 M-289

Page 145: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

X Word (Second G76 Block):

For a straight external thread the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter of the thread.For a straight internal thread the X word specifies the O.D. (Major Diameter) of the thread.When cutting tapered threads, the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter at the largeend of the external thread or O.D. (Major Diameter) at the small end for an internal thread.The sign will be positive when cutting on the front side of the spindle centerline (+X) andnegative when cutting on the back side of the spindle centerline (-X).

Z Word (Second G76 Block):

In Absolute programming mode the Z word specifies the Absolute Z coordinate at the endof the thread. Unless the face of the part has been set to Z Zero by a Work Shift offset, Zwill be relative to the spindle face. When a Work Shift is used, Z will be relative to the faceof the part. The sign of Z will be positive when measured from the spindle face and nega-tive when measured from the face of the part.

R Word (Second G76 Block):

- NOTE -The R word is programmed in the second G76 block ONLY when tapered threadsare to be produced.

The R word specifies the amount of taper on a side for a tapered thread and is measuredparallel to the X axis. It is calculated as follows:

R = W x TAN B

( x = Multiplication )

Where B = Angle of taper with workpiece centerline.

The R word may be programmed as R0 (zero) or omitted when cutting a straight thread.When cutting a tapered thread, length W must include the additional travel required for thestart point on the Z axis. When cutting a tapered thread in the +X direction, as shown inthe Figure 7.9, R must have a NEGATIVE (-) value. If the minus sign is not used, R is as-sumed to be positive and the taper will be cut in the -X direction, opposite the directionshown in Figure 7.9 . A conventional external pipe thread being cut on the front side wouldrequire a NEGATIVE “R” value in order to cause the taper to be cut in the +X directionwhen the tool is moving in the -Z direction.

M-289 7-17

Page 146: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G76 PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. After the initial pass, the control automatically calculates the depth of cut based on a con-stant volume removal of material. Minimum cutting depth is controlled by parameter 5140.This parameter is controlled by the Q word in the first G76 block.

2. During the return path the control defaults to rapid traverse. If a slower rate is desired usethe % Rapid Override switch.

3. For precision threadcutting, the feedrate for the thread lead should be limited to a maxi-mum of 120 inches per minute. Refer to page 7-1.

4. The number of clean-up passes is set by parameter 5142. This parameter is controlled bythe first two digits in the P word in the first G76 block. As shipped from Hardinge Brothers,Inc., this parameter is set at 1. It may be set from 1 to 99 passes.

5. The RESET key is active during the threading passes. The % Feedrate Override switch isdisabled during an G76 Automatic Threading Cycle unless it is set to 0%. When the %Feedrate Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion WILL STOP.

7-18 M-289

Page 147: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G34 VARIABLE LEAD THREADCUTTING (OPTION)The Variable Lead Threadcutting feature enables the programmer to cut straight or tapered

threads having linear increasing or decreasing leads. The G34 code is used to prepare the con-trol for cutting leads of either type.

The length of thread is determined by the distance command for X and/or Z. Only one axisneed be programmed for a linear thread; both axes must be programmed for a tapered thread.

The initial thread lead is determined by programming an F word. For tapered threads, F ismeasured parallel to the Z axis when the angle of taper with the workpiece centerline is equal toor less than 45 degrees. When the angle is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel tothe X axis.

The rate at which the thread lead increases or decreases is programmed as a K word. This isthe linear increase or decrease per revolution - not the change in lead per inch. It is calculatedfrom the formula:

KFinal Lead Initial Lead

x Thread Length=

−[ ] [ ]2 2

2

- NOTE -When solving the preceding formula for threads with decreasing lead, the value ofK will be negative. The minus sign must be programmed for threads with decreas-ing lead or the control will assume plus and cut threads with increasing lead.

The maximum spindle speed that can be programmed when cutting variable lead threads isdetermined by the maximum lead from the formula:

MAX. RPM = 120 IPM ÷ Maximum Lead

The maximum lead for a given spindle speed should be limited to those shown in the chart onpage 7-1. Above these values to maximum programmable feedrate of 400 in/min [10160mm/min] on the X and Z axis, the lead error should be checked to make certain it does not ex-ceed the specifications for the thread being produced.

When cutting a thread with decreasing lead, if the K word is large enough to decrease thethread lead to zero before the end of the thread is reached, the control will go into a Cycle Stopand alarm message #14 will be displayed on the CRT screen.

The G34 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.

The data words have the following format:

Data Word StructureCHNC® III MACHINE

Inch Programming: X(U)±2.4, Z(W)±2.4, F1.6, K±1.6Metric Programming: X(U)±3.3, Z(W)±3.3, F3.4, K±3.4

CHNC IIISP SUPER-PRECISION® MACHINE

Inch Programming: X(U)±2.5, Z(W)±2.5, F1.6, K±1.6Metric Programming: X(U)±3.4, Z(W)±3.4, F3.4, K±3.4

M-289 7-19

Page 148: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- CAUTION -When the % Feedrate Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion WILL STOP.

The % Feedrate Override switch is not active during a threadcutting pass unless it is set to0%.

- NOTE -The optional Threadcutting Cycle Retract feature is NOT active during G34 Vari-able Lead Threadcutting.

Program the spindle speed for a threading operation in a block of data preceding the G34threadcutting data block. This will allow time for the spindle speed to stabilize before enteringthe threadcutting mode. Program the threadcutting passes to start a distance equal to 4 timesthe lead or .250 inches (6.5mm), whichever is greater, away from the thread. This will allow timefor the spindle speed and feedrate to completely synchronize.

Figure 7.10, illustrates an elementary part that is to have a .0625 pitch, single lead thread cuton a .75 inch diameter. The thread has constant lead for the first .75 inch and variable lead forthe last .25 inch. The variable lead section decreases from .0625 lead to .0575 lead. The valueof K is computed as follows:

Kx

=−

= −[ . ] [ . ]

..

0575 06252 25

00122 2

The face of the part extends 2.775 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored asZ-2.77500 under Work Shift offset. This sets the face of the part to zero. All threading passeswill be in the minus Z direction.

The tool nose reference point is 1.25 inches from the turret face in the -X direction and .25inches in the -Z direction. These dimensions are stored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file underoffset 07. The offsets are activated by the T0707 command in block N370.

Only two threading passes are shown (N400, N410 and N450, N460), since the only changewill be in the position of the X axis. Z axis movements remain constant.

- NOTE -In the G34 blocks, the length of the variable lead section could have been pro-grammed as Z-1.

Notice that the O.D. of the variable lead section is gradually reduced due to maintaining thesame depth as for the constant lead section.

7-20 M-289

Page 149: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G34 VARIABLE LEAD THREADING (Figure 7.19)

Sample Program:N7 (T0707 VARIABLE LEAD THREAD) N430 Z0.25 ;N350 G97 S1200 M13 ; N440 G01 X0.706 F50. ;N360 M98 P1 ; N450 G32 Z-0.75 F0.0625 ;N370 T0707 ; N460 G34 W-0.25 K-0.0012 ;N380 X0.85 Z0.25 ; N470 G0 X0.85 ;N390 G1 X0.726 F50. ; N480 Z0.25 ;N400 G32 Z-0.75 F0.0625 ; N490 G1 X0.693 F50. ;N410 G34 W-0.25 K-0.0012 ; .N420 G0 X0.85 ; .

LEFT-HAND THREADSIf left-hand threads are to be cut from right to left (-Z direction), the spindle must be run in re-

verse (M04) and the threading tool is positioned upside down in a tool holder designed to locatethe tool tip on the spindle centerline.

THREADING FROM LEFT TO RIGHT

Left-hand threads can be cut from left to right (+Z direction) by running the spindle in the for-ward direction (M03) and using a right-hand threading tool holder. When this method is used, arelief of .25 inches or four times the thread lead, whichever is greater, is required to provideclearance for the threading tool. This clearance is required to allow the CNC control to synchro-nize spindle and axis motion and also to prevent ringing the first thread.

Left-hand threads can also be cut from left to right (+Z direction) using the Multiple RepetitiveThreading Cycle (G76). See “Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76)”, page 7-11.

Position the cutting tool at the desired Start Point prior to entering the threading mode andprogram the Z word in the second G76 block as a positive (+) value if the right end of the threadis at the part face. If the right end of the thread is to the left of the part face, program the Z wordin the second G76 block as a negative (-) value

M-289 7-21

Figure 7.10 - Variable Lead Threadcutting

TI1800

.850

.250.750

.0625

.750

.250

.0575.400 .500

2.775

1.000

CL

SPINDLEFACE

CHUCKFACE

Page 150: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

TAPPINGUse a self-releasing style tap holder with sufficient longitudinal float to allow the spindle to re-

verse direction. The Hardinge Model TT-5/8 tap holder has a “pullout to release” increment of3/32 inch (2.38mm), which is sufficient.

1. Use the G32 Preparatory Command.

2. Program the lead command (F Word) .001 inch (.0254 mm) per revolution less than the ac-tual thread lead.

3. Minimum dwell for holder release is determined as follows:

Minimum DwellTap Pullout x

Thread Lead x RPM=

60

4. Reverse spindle and feed out at lead (F Word), a distance Z which is sufficient to clear theworkpiece.

Example:

Tap a 1/4-20 thread, 1/2 inch deep using a Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder. Spindle speed is250 RPM.

Minimum Dwell (step 3) for Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder is determined as follows:

Minimum Dwellx

xSeconds= =

.

..

094 6005 250

45

(Rounded to nearest tenth of a second equals .5).

Assume that the part length has been stored as a Work Zero Offset and that tool offset di-mensions have been stored in a Tool Offset (Geometry) file.

Operator Message N5 (T05 1/4-20 TAP)Spindle Forward 250 RPM, Coolant ON N120 G97 S250 M13 ;Call Safe Start/End Program O1 N130 M98 P1 ;Select Tool Offset N140 T0505 ;Approach N150 X0. Z0.5 ;Tap N160 G32 Z-0.5 F0.049 ;

(See Z Depth Calculation on the next page)Dwell .5 Sec. N170 G4 X0.5 ;Spindle Reverse, Coolant ON N180 M14 ;Clear Workpiece by .50 Inch N190 G32 Z0.5 F0.05;Call Safe Start/End Program O1 N200 M98 P1 ;Optional Stop N210 M1 ;

7-22 M-289

Page 151: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Z DEPTH CALCULATION

In the sample program above, the tap holder pull-out value and the length of unusable threadare assumed to be equal.

The -Z dimension in block N160 is calculated in the following manner:

1. Subtract the tap holder pull-out value (3/32 in this case) from the required final depth ofthread.

2. Add the length of unusable thread which will be produced by the tap, if any, to the valuecalculated in step 1.

3. Program the value calculated in step 2 as a -Z data word in the G32 program block to beused for the tapping operation.

M-289 7-23

Page 152: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

7-24 M-289

Page 153: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 8 - INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

DATA COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLData communications protocol consists of three basic types of information: parity, baud rate,

and stop bits. The baud rate and stop bits are controlled by parameters, which may be modifiedas required.

TAPE PARITY CHECK

Tapes punched in EIA format (EIA Standard RS-244-B) contain an odd number of holes ineach character and tapes punched in ASCII (ISO), (EIA Standard RS-358-B) contain an evennumber of holes in each character. This characteristic of having an odd or even number of holespunched in every character is called parity.

The control accepts tape punched in either code, but each tape must be programmed in onlyone of the accepted codes.

The control automatically determines the particular type of coding by decoding the first End ofBlock (;) character on the tape. Each character is checked for parity as it is read by the tapereader or computer.

Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape punch, tape reader, or computer to the de-sired parity.

BAUD RATE

Baud rate is the speed at which data is transmitted from one device to another. To success-fully transmit data between two devices, it is necessary to have both devices set to the samebaud rate.

The baud rate is set by three different parameters, depending on which I/O port is active. Re-fer to the I/O setting on Setting Page #1 to determine which I/O port is active. Refer to “I/O PortAssignment”, page 8-3.

Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape punch, tape reader, or computer to the de-sired baud rate.

STOP BITS

The GE Fanuc 18T control is capable of operating with 1 or 2 stop bits, depending on the re-quirement. The number of stop bits active in the machine control is controlled by three differentparameters, depending on which I/O port is active. These parameters may be modified as re-quired. Refer to “I/O Port Assignment”, page 8-3.

Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape punch, tape reader, or computer to the de-sired number of stop bits.

M-289 8-1

Page 154: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHECKING AND MODIFYING COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERSUse the following procedure to check communications protocol parameters:

1. Press the SYSTEM function key, Figure 8.1 .

2. Press the PARAM soft key.

3. Use the PAGE keys to display the parameter page to be viewed.

Use the following procedure to check and modify communications protocol parameters asneeded:

1. Press the OFFSET SETTING function key, Figure 8.1 .

2. Press the SETING soft key.

3. If necessary, use the PAGE keys to display the SETTING (HANDY) page.

4. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the PARAMETER WRITE field.

5. Press MDI push button “E”, Figure 8.2 .

6. Key in the number 1 (one).

7. Press the INPUT key, Figure 8.1 . Parameter editing will be enabled.

8. Press the SYSTEM function key.

9. Press the PARAM soft key.

10. Use the CURSOR and PAGE keys to position the cursor on the parameter to be modified.

11. Key in the new parameter value.

12. Press the INPUT key.

8-2 M-289

Figure 8.1 - CRT/MDI Panel

TI2803A

Soft Key Expansion Key

Page 155: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

13. Repeat steps 10 through 12, as needed.

14. Press the OFFSET SETTING key.

15. Press the SETING soft key.

16. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the PARAMETER WRITE field.

17. Key in the number 0 (zero).

18. Press the INPUT key. Parameter editing will be disabled.

I/O PORT ASSIGNMENTThe standard configuration for CHNC® III and IIISP Super-Precision® machines is to be

equipped with one physical RS-232 port. When the machine tool is configured in this manner,two independent port assignments are available to allow the operator or programmer to establishtwo different I/O port configurations for the same physical I/O port. These two configurations aredesignated as channels “0" and ”1".

Instead of changing the associated parameters to reassign the baud rate and stop bits, it ispossible to select a different I/O port assignment and have the changes implemented by thecontrol automatically. Refer to the CHNC III Machine Operator’s Manual (M-290) for informationon setting the desired I/O port assignment.

When the machine tool is equipped with a second physical RS-232 port (optional), a third I/Oport configuration is available. This configuration is designated as channel “2". When channel ”2"is selected as the active port, the external device (tape punch, tape reader, or computer) will beconnected to the second physical RS-232 port.

Refer to “I/O Port Parameter Settings”, on the next page, for a listing of the parameter set-tings for the I/O port assignments.

M-289 8-3

Figure 8.2 - Operator Control Panel

TI1547

A

B

C D E

Page 156: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

I/O PORT PARAMETER SETTINGSRefer to “Checking and Modifying Communications Parameters”, starting on page 8-2, for in-

formation on modifying the parameter settings for the three I/O ports. These parameters may bemodified as required.

BAUD RATE PARAMETER SETTINGS

Input/Output Port Parameter Number

0 103

1 113

2 123

The valid parameter settings are as follows:

Setting Number Baud Rate

1 50

2 100

3 110

4 150

5 200

6 300

7 600

8 1200

9 2400

10 4800

11 9600

12 19200

STOP BIT PARAMETER SETTINGS

Input/Output Port Parameter Number Bit Number

0 101 0

1 111 0

2 121 0

The valid parameter settings are “0" for 1 Stop Bit and ”1" for 2 Stop Bits.

- NOTE -The Stop Bit parameter settings are displayed as one bit in an 8 bit binary number(0 or 1). The bits are read “0" to ”7", from right to left.

8-4 M-289

Page 157: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DATA TRANSFER TO THE CONTROLUPLOADING CONTROL PARAMETERS INTO MEMORY

- CAUTION -Always connect the RS-232 cable before applying power to the external deviceand always remove power from the external device before disconnecting theRS-232 cable.

1. Verify the machine control communications protocol as outlined under “Checking and Mod-ifying Communication Protocol”, page 8-2.

2. Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape reader or computer to the desired commu-nications protocol.

3. Remove the magnetic access cover that is located on the side of the power case, and con-nect the interface cable from the tape reader or computer to serial port “F”, Figure 8.3 .

4. Press the OFFSET SETTING function key, Figure 8.1 .

5. Press the SETING soft key.

6. If necessary, use the PAGE keys to display the SETTING (HANDY) page.

7. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the PARAMETER WRITE field.

8. Press MDI push button “E”, Figure 8.2 .

9. Key in the number 1 (one).

10. Press the INPUT key, Figure 8.1 . Parameter editing will be enabled.

11. Press the SYSTEM key.

12. Press the PARAM soft key.

13. Press the (OPRT) soft key.

14. Press EDIT push button “D”, Figure 8.2 .

15. Press the soft key expansion key, Figure 8.1, until the READ soft key is displayed.

16. Press the READ soft key.

17. Press the EXEC soft key.

18. Set the tape reader or computer to transmitdata to the machine control.

19. After the control parameters have been up-loaded, press MDI push button “E”, Figure8.2 .

20. Press the OFFSET SETTING function key.

21. Key in the number 0 (zero).

22. Press the INPUT key. Parameter editing willbe disabled.

M-289 8-5

Figure 8.3 - Serial PortTI2816

F

Page 158: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

23. Remove power from the external device; then, disconnect the RS-232 cable from the ma-chine control.

24. Replace the magnetic access cover.

25. Turn the control OFF and wait approximately 10 seconds.

26. Turn the control ON.

UPLOADING PART PROGRAMS INTO MEMORY

- CAUTION -Always connect the RS-232 cable before applying power to the external deviceand always remove power from the external device before disconnecting theRS-232 cable.

1. Verify the machine control communications protocol as outlined “Checking and ModifyingCommunication Protocol”, page 8-2.

2. Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape reader or computer to the desired commu-nications protocol.

3. Remove the magnetic access cover that is located on the side of the power case, and con-nect the interface cable from the tape reader or computer to serial port “F”, Figure 8.3 .

4. Press EDIT push button “D”, Figure 8.2 .

5. Press the PROG key, Figure 8.1 .

6. Turn PROGRAM PROTECT key “B”, Figure 8.2, to OFF.

7. Press the soft key expansion key, Figure 8.1, until the READ soft key is displayed.

- NOTE -If the program has no program number or if the program number is to be altered,key in the letter “O” and the desired program number.

8. Key in the letter “O” and the program number. Example: O1111

9. Press the READ soft key.

10. Press the EXEC soft key.

11. Set the tape reader or computer to transmit data to the machine control.

- NOTE -When the program has been completely loaded into the control, it will appear asthe active program on the CRT screen.

12. After the part programs have been uploaded, turn PROGRAM PROTECT key “B”, Figure8.2, to ON.

13. Remove power from the external device; then, disconnect the RS-232 cable from the ma-chine control.

14. Replace the magnetic access cover.

8-6 M-289

Page 159: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

UPLOADING TOOL OFFSETS INTO MEMORY

- CAUTION -Always connect the RS-232 cable before applying power to the external deviceand always remove power from the external device before disconnecting theRS-232 cable.

1. Verify the machine control communications protocol as outlined under “Checking and Mod-ifying Communication Protocol”, page 8-2.

2. Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape reader, or computer to the desired commu-nications protocol.

3. Remove the magnetic access cover that is located on the side of the power case, and con-nect the interface cable from the tape reader or computer to serial port “F”, Figure 8.3 .

4. Press EDIT push button “D”, Figure 8.2 .

5. Press the PROG key, Figure 8.1 .

6. Press the soft key expansion key until the READ soft key is displayed.

7. Turn PROGRAM PROTECT key “B”, Figure 8.2, to OFF.

- NOTE -Offsets loaded through the RS-232 serial port are loaded as a separate program.Once loaded, this program is executed to enter the offset values into the offsetfiles.

Be sure this program number does not match a program number already presentin the control memory.

8. Key in the letter “O” and the desired program number.

9. Press the READ soft key.

10. Press the EXEC soft key.

11. Set the tape reader or computer to transmit data to the machine control.

- NOTE -When the offset program has been completely loaded into the control, it will appearas the active program on the CRT screen.

12. After the tool offsets have been uploaded, press the control RESET key, Figure 8.1 .

13. Press AUTO push button “C”, Figure 8.2 .

14. Press CYCLE START push button “A”.

15. Turn PROGRAM PROTECT key “B” to ON.

16. Remove power from the external device; then, disconnect the RS-232 cable from the ma-chine control.

17. Replace the magnetic access cover.

M-289 8-7

Page 160: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DATA TRANSFER FROM THE CONTROLDOWNLOADING CONTROL PARAMETERS FROM MEMORY

- CAUTION -Always connect the RS-232 cable before applying power to the external deviceand always remove power from the external device before disconnecting theRS-232 cable.

1. Verify the machine control communications protocol as outlined earlier under “Checkingand Modifying Communication Protocol”, page 8-2.

2. Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape punch or computer to the desired commu-nications protocol.

3. Remove the magnetic access cover that is located on the side of the power case, and con-nect the interface cable from the tape reader or computer to serial port “F”, Figure 8.3 .

4. Connect the interface cable to the output device and the serial port on the control.

5. Set the tape punch or computer to receive data.

6. Press EDIT push button “D”, Figure 8.2 .

7. Press the SYSTEM key, Figure 8.1 .

8. Press the PARAM soft key.

9. Press the (OPRT) soft key.

10. Press the PUNCH soft key.

11. Press the EXEC soft key.

- NOTE -To stop the parameters from downloading, press the control RESET key, Figure8.1 . Once the control RESET key has been pressed, it is not possible to downloadthe rest of the parameters without starting this procedure from the beginning.

12. After the control parameters have been downloaded, remove power from the external de-vice and disconnect the RS-232 cable from the machine control.

13. Replace the magnetic access cover “F”.

8-8 M-289

Page 161: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DOWNLOADING PART PROGRAMS FROM MEMORY

- CAUTION -Always connect the RS-232 cable before applying power to the external deviceand always remove power from the external device before disconnecting theRS-232 cable.

1. Verify the machine control communications protocol as outlined under “Checking and Mod-ifying Communication Protocol”, page 8-2.

2. Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape punch or computer to the desired commu-nications protocol.

3. Remove the magnetic access cover that is located on the side of the power case, and con-nect the interface cable from the tape reader or computer to serial port “F”, Figure 8.3 .

4. Connect the interface cable to the output device and the serial port on the control.

5. Set the tape punch or computer to receive data.

6. Press EDIT push button “D”, Figure 8.2 .

7. Press the PROG key, Figure 8.1 .

8. Key in the letter “O” and the program number. Example: O1111

9. Press the soft key expansion key until the PUNCH soft key is displayed.

10. Press the PUNCH key.

11. Press the EXEC soft key.

- NOTE -When outputting to a tape punch, the control will automatically output 3 feet ofleader and trailer tape. To shorten the leader or trailer length, press the CAN keywhile the leader or trailer is being punched, respectively.

To stop the part program from downloading, press the control RESET key, Figure8.1 . Once the control RESET key has been pressed, it is not possible to downloadthe rest of the part program without starting this procedure from the beginning.

12. After the part programs have been downloaded, remove power from the external deviceand disconnect the RS-232 cable from the machine control.

13. Replace the magnetic access cover.

M-289 8-9

Page 162: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

DOWNLOADING TOOL OFFSETS FROM MEMORY

- CAUTION -Always connect the RS-232 cable before applying power to the external deviceand always remove power from the external device before disconnecting theRS-232 cable.

1. Verify the machine control communications protocol as outlined under “Checking and Mod-ifying Communication Protocol”, page 8-2.

2. Refer to the appropriate manual to set the tape punch or computer to the desired commu-nications protocol.

3. Remove the magnetic access cover that is located on the side of the power case, and con-nect the interface cable from the tape reader or computer to serial port “F”, Figure 8.3 .

4. Connect the interface cable to the output device and the serial port on the control.

5. Set the tape punch or computer to receive data.

6. Press EDIT push button “D”, Figure 8.2 .

7. Press the OFFSET SETTING key, Figure 8.1 .

8. Press the OFFSET soft key.

9. Press the GEOM soft key to display the Geometry offset page.

10. Press the (OPRT) soft key.

11. Press the soft key expansion key until the PUNCH soft key is displayed.

12. Press the PUNCH key.

13. Press the EXEC soft key.

- NOTE -To stop the tool offsets from downloading, press the control RESET key, Figure8.1. Once the control RESET key has been pressed, it is not possible to downloadthe rest of the tool offsets without starting this procedure from the beginning.

14. After the tool offsets have been downloaded, remove power from the external device anddisconnect the RS-232 cable from the machine control.

15. Replace the magnetic access cover.

8-10 M-289

Page 163: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

M-289 8-11

Page 164: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

8-12 M-289

Page 165: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 9 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING

INTRODUCTIONThe Blueprint Programming feature allows the programmer to define the part contour by spec-

ifying the end point values along with the desired angle. The intersection points of the straightlines are input as coordinate values or a coordinate value and an angle.

Straight lines can be directly connected to form sharp, chamfered, or rounded corners. It isonly necessary to specify the size of the chamfer or corner radius and the CNC control performsthe required calculations. The respective end point coordinates can be programmed using abso-lute or incremental positioning data.

Linear Interpolation (G01) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are executed.

DEFINING ANGLESAngles are defined by referencing the part contour to a zero reference angle, as shown in

Figure 9.1 . The data word format for angle definition (A Words) is 3.5 . A comma MUST pre-cede the data word and a decimal point MUST be programmed with the numerical value.

Minimum Input Value: .00001 degrees

Maximum Input Value: 359.99999 degrees

M-289 9-1

Figure 9.1 - Angle DefinitionTI1692

Z Axis

Positive

Negative

180°0°

+90°

-90°0°

30°

30°

,A-30.

,A30.

180°

180°

Workpiece

Workpiece

Page 166: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLESEight basic examples of blueprint programming are illustrated in Figures 9.2 through 9.17 .

The lines of programming which accompany each of these examples illustrate the programmingformat used for blueprint programming.

These basic examples may be combined to form a wide variety of programming variations.

- NOTE -The numerical values shown in the following examples are not coordinate values.They serve only as part of the coordinate designation to help distinguish betweenthe various “X”, “Z”, “,A”, “,C”, and “,R” values.

Example 1: TWO POINTS(Refer to Figures 9.2 and 9.3)

N____ X2 ,A____ ;orN____ Z2 ,A____ ;

This basic two point definition allows the programmer to specify a linear move by either pro-gramming an X and an A word or programming a Z and an A word.

The CNC control moves the tool nose reference point from the start point at the prescribedangle until the appropriate position register is equal to the programmed coordinate value.

9-2 M-289

Figure 9.2 - Linear MoveBetween Two Points

TI2114

X1, Z1(Start Point)

+X

+Z

(End Point)X2, Z2

A

Figure 9.3 - Sample Program Segment

TI2114

+X

+Z

X.4 Z0.

28°

Z-.687

X2.Z? X.4 Z0. ;

Z-.687 ;X2. ,A28. ;

Page 167: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Example 2: THREE POINTS(Refer to Figures 9.4 and 9.5)

N____ ,A1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;

This basic three point definition allows the programmer to specify two consecutive linearmoves.

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle.

The second linear move is programmed with an X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Z val-ues specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle of the sec-ond linear move in relation to the zero reference angle.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection point of the two linear moves. The tool nose reference point is moved fromthe start point at the prescribed angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the calculatedintersection point. The control then moves the tool nose reference point from the calculated in-tersection point to the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.

M-289 9-3

Figure 9.4 - Linear MovesBetween Three Points

TI2115

X1, Z1(Start Point)

X2, Z2

(End Point)X3, Z3

+X

+Z

A2

A1

Figure 9.5 - Sample Program SegmentTI2115

+X

+Z

X.4 Z0.Z-.6

X? Z?

X2. Z-1.8

20°

43° X.4 Z0. ;Z-.6 ;,A20. ;X2. Z-1.8 ,A43. ;

Page 168: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Example 3: THREE POINTS WITH A RADIUS(Refer to Figures 9.6 and 9.7)

This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a radiusautomatically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming are il-lustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves.The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed endpoints for the second linear move.

- NOTE -When using the “,R” command, an inserted radius MUST blend smoothly with thelinear moves on each side of it.

METHOD #1:N____ X2 Z2 ,R ;N____ X3 Z3 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (R1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the toolnose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the toolnose reference point through the proper arc to create the programmed radius and performs alinear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.

9-4 M-289

Figure 9.6 - Radius Inserted BetweenTwo Linear Moves

TI2116

X1, Z1(Start Point)

X2, Z2

X3, Z3(End Point)

A1

A2

+X

+Z

R

Figure 9.7 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)

TI2116

+X

+Z

X.4 Z0.Z-.5

X? Z?

X2.4 Z-1.8

.1

25°

60°

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A25. ,R.1 ;X2.4 Z-1.8 ,A60. ;

Page 169: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the an-gle of the first straight line move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (R1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Z co-ordinate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedradius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle untilthe tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control movesthe tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the programmed radius and per-forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3, and A2.

M-289 9-5

Page 170: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Example 4: THREE POINTS WITH A CHAMFER(Refer to Figures 9.8 and 9.9)

This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a chamferautomatically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming are il-lustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves.The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed endpoints along with an angle definition for the second linear move.

- NOTE -When using the “,C” command, the control calculates the theoretical intersectionpoint of the two linear moves; then starts and ends the inserted chamfer equidis-tant from the theoretical intersection point.

METHOD #1:N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (C1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the toolnose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves thetool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the programmed chamfer and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coor-dinates.

9-6 M-289

Figure 9.8 - Chamfer Inserted BetweenTwo Linear Moves

TI2117

X1, Z1(Start Point)

X2, Z2

(End Point)X3, Z3

A1

A2

+X

+Z

C

Figure 9.9 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)

+X

+Z

18°

65°

X.4 Z0.Z-.5

X? Z?

X2.3 Z-1.9

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A18. ,C.125 ;X2.3 Z-1.9 ,A65. ;

TI2117

.125

Page 171: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Z co-ordinate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedchamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle un-til the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the programmed chamferand then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3,and A2.

M-289 9-7

Page 172: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Example 5: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO RADII(Refer to Figures 9.10 and 9.11)

This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radiusautomatically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming areillustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linearmoves. The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and endpoint data for the second linear move, and programmed end points for the third linear move.

- NOTE -When using the “,R” command, an inserted radius MUST blend smoothly with thelinear moves on each side of it.

METHOD #1:N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,R2 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (R1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (R2) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.

9-8 M-289

Figure 9.10 - Two Radii Inserted BetweenThree Linear Moves

TI2118

X1, Z1 (Start Point)

X2, Z2

X3, Z3

(EndPoint)

A1

A2

+X

+Z

R1

R2

Z4

Figure 9.11 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)

TI2118

+X

+Z

X.4 Z0.X? Z?

X2.25 Z-1.8

Z-.5

Z-2.3

.2

.4

20°

60°X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A20. ,R.2 ;X2.25 Z-1.8 ,A60. ,R.4 ;Z-2.3 ;

Page 173: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed radii. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the toolnose reference point reaches the point where the first radius is to begin. The control moves thetool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the first programmed radius and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the second radius is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the second programmedradius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by theZ4 coordinate.

METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R2 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (R1) is programmed in thesame data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (R2) is programmed in the same datablock as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedradii. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle untilthe tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control movesthe tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the first programmed radius andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the second radius is to begin. The con-trol moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the second pro-grammed radius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as de-fined by the Z4 coordinate.

M-289 9-9

Page 174: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Example 6: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO CHAMFERS(Refer to Figures 9.12 and 9.13)

This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamferautomatically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming areillustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linearmoves. The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and endpoint data for the second linear move, and programmed end points for the third linear move.

- NOTE -When using the “,C” command, the control calculates the theoretical intersectionpoints of the three linear moves; then starts and ends the inserted chamfers equi-distant from the theoretical intersection points.

METHOD #1:N____ X2 Z2 ,C1;N____ X3 Z3 ,C2;N____ X4 Z4;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (C1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (C2) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the X4 and Z4 data words. The X and Z coordinatevalues specify the end point of the third linear move.

9-10 M-289

Figure 9.12 - Chamfers Inserted BetweenThree Linear Moves

TI2119

X1, Z1 (Start Point)

X2, Z2

X3, Z3

(EndPoint)

A1

A2

+Z

+X

C1

C2

Figure 9.13 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)

+X

+Z

X.4 Z0.Z-.5

X? Z?

X2.3 Z-1.75X2.4Z-2.2

.07

.156

20°

63°

TI2119

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A20. ,C.07 ;X2.3 Z-1.75 ,A63. ,C.156 ;X2.4 Z-2.2 ;

Page 175: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed chamfers. The tool nose reference point is moved fromthe start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until thetool nose reference point reaches the point where the first chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the second chamfer andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4coordinates.

METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C2 ;N____ X4 Z4 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (C2) is programmed in the samedata block as the second linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedchamfers. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angleuntil the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the second chamfer andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4coordinates.

M-289 9-11

Page 176: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Example 7: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE RADIUS AND CHAMFER(Refer to Figures 9.14 and 9.15)

This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radiusautomatically inserted at the first intersection point and a chamfer automatically inserted at thesecond intersection point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The firstmethod uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses anangle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move,and a programmed end point for the third linear move.

- NOTE -When using the “,R” command, an inserted radius MUST blend smoothly with thelinear moves on each side of it.

When using the “,C” command, the control calculates the theoretical intersectionpoint of the two linear moves; then starts and ends the inserted chamfer equidis-tant from the theoretical intersection point.

METHOD #1:N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,C1 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (R1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.

9-12 M-289

Figure 9.14 - Radius and ChamferInserted Between Moves

TI2120

X1, Z1 (Start Point)

X2, Z2

X3, Z3

A1

A2

+X

+Z

R

C

Z4(EndPoint)

Figure 9.15 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)

+X

+Z

X.4 Z0.Z-.5

X? Z?

X2.5 Z-2.03Z-2.5

.2

.25

22°

60°

TI2120

X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A22. ,R.25 ;X2.5 Z-2.03 ,A60. ,C.2 ;Z-2.5 ;

Page 177: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed radius and chamfer. The tool nose reference point ismoved from the start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designatedX2 Z2, until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. Thecontrol moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control movesthe tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then performs alinear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.

METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C1 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (R1) is programmed in thesame data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (C1) is programmed in the samedata block as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedradius and chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the pre-scribed angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin.The control moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then per-forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.

M-289 9-13

Page 178: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Example 8: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE CHAMFER AND RADIUS(Refer to Figures 9.16 and 9.17)

This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamferautomatically inserted at the first intersection point and a radius automatically inserted at thesecond intersection point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The firstmethod uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses anangle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move,and a programmed end point for the third linear move.

- NOTE -When using the “,C” command, the control calculates the theoretical intersectionpoint of the two linear moves; then starts and ends the inserted chamfer equidis-tant from the theoretical intersection point.

When using the “,R” command, an inserted radius MUST blend smoothly with thelinear moves on each side of it.

METHOD #1:N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,R1 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (C1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (R1) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.

9-14 M-289

Figure 9.16 - Chamfer and RadiusInserted Between Moves

TI2121

X1, Z1 (Start Point)

X2, Z2

X3, Z3(EndPoint)

A1

A2

+X

+Z

R

C

Z4

Figure 9.17 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)

TI2121+X

+Z

X.4 Z0.Z-.5

X? Z?

X2. Z-1.5Z-2.1

.25

.09

17°

56°X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A17. ,C.09 ;X2. Z-1.5 ,A56. ,R.25 ;Z-2.1 ;

Page 179: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed chamfer and radius. The tool nose reference point ismoved from the start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designatedX2 Z2, until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. Thecontrol moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the radius is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then per-forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.

METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R1 ;N____ Z4 ;

The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.

The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (R1) is programmed in the same datablock as the second linear move.

The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.

Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedchamfer and radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the pre-scribed angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to be-gin. The control moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the cham-fer and then performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the radius is to begin. The con-trol moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.

M-289 9-15

Page 180: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

SAMPLE PROGRAM

N3 (Finish Face and Turn R.015 Q3) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG97 M13 ; Spindle Forward 1000 RPM/Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start/End Program O1T0303 ; Select Turret Station #3 and Tool Offset #3X-0.031 Z0.2 ; Move to Activate X and Z Axis Tool OffsetsG50 S4800 ; CSS 4800 RPM LimitG96 S370 ; Establish CSS, 370 Surface Feet per MinuteG1 G42 X-0.03 Z.1 F100. ; Move to Activate TNRCG99 Z0. F.004 ; Feed to Face of WorkpieceX1. ,R0.06 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Insert a .06 RadiusZ-0.25 ,C0.0625 ; Cut to Z-.25, Insert a .0625 ChamferX0.5 ,A-50. ,R0.125 ; Cut to a .5 inch diameter at an angle of 50 degrees,

Insert a .125 Radius,A180. ,R.125 ; Cut at 180 degree angle, Insert a .125 radiusX1. Z-1.375 ,A50. ,C0.0625 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Cut to Z-1.375, Cut at an angle of

50 degrees, Insert a .0625 ChamferZ-1.625 ; Cut to Z-1.625X1.09 ; Clear workpiece by three times the tool nose diameter.M98 P1 ; Call Safe Start/End Program O1M01 ; Optional Stop

9-16 M-289

Figure 9.18 - Finished Workpiece for Sample ProgramTI1774

.0625 Chamfer.0625 Chamfer

.125 Radius

.06 Radius

1.0001.000

.500

.250

50°

.250

.125 Radius

50°

1.625

Page 181: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. A comma must precede an A (angle), C (chamfer), or R (radius) command.

2. When using a “,C” command to insert a chamfer between two linear moves, the chamferwill be equal on both sides of the lines intersected.

3. When using a “,R” command to insert a radius between two linear moves, the radiusMUST be tangentially blended between the two moves. If a non-tangential radius is re-quired, program the radius using a G02/G03 code.

4. When programming either an insert chamfer or radius, the intersection point must be pro-grammed.

5. The value of the chamfer or radius is always positive and it is to be programmed after thelinear move where it is to be inserted.

6. When defining angles, the decimal point MUST be programmed.

7. G01 (linear Interpolation) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are executed.

M-289 9-17

Page 182: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

9-18 M-289

Page 183: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CHAPTER 10 - MISCELLANEOUS

CONSTANT SURFACE SPEEDConstant Surface Speed (CSS) programming provides the capability of programming the

speed of the workpiece with respect to the tool tip directly in surface feet per minute in inchmode (G20) or surface meters per minute in metric mode (G21).

CSS programming is a function of the spindle speed range and the programmed constant sur-face speed (S word). The CSS mode is selected by the G96 command and is canceled by G97.The G97 command is the start-up mode and selects the direct rpm mode, which allows directrpm programming of the spindle speed.

Before programming a G96 command, a block containing a G50 command and an S wordMUST be programmed to establish the maximum rpm limit for the following CSS operation. Theformat for the S word is S4 . As the distance between the tool tip and the spindle centerline var-ies during a CSS operation, the variable spindle speed is compared to this maximum rpm limit. Ifthe limit is reached, the control will continue execution of the part program at the spindle speedlimit.

- CAUTION -When establishing the CSS spindle rpm limit, do not program any other datawords in the same block with the G50 command and the S word.

In CSS mode, the constant surface speed command to the spindle is also programmed as anS word. The format is S4 in inch mode (G20) and S3 in metric mode (G21). The units are sur-face feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in metric mode (G21).

A feedrate must also be programmed. The control will then automatically adjust the spindlespeed within its range to maintain a constant surface speed as the cutting radius of theworkpiece varies. Since the feedrate is held constant while the spindle speed varies, it is recom-mended that the feedrate be programmed in inches per revolution (G99). This will prevent over-loading the tool in case a fast feedrate is active when the spindle speed is decreasing (as whenfacing from the center outward).

Figure 10.1 illustrates an elementary part that uses CSS programming. For this example, it isassumed that the part has already been roughed out and is ready to be finish contoured.

Since all dimensions are in inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric data input mode (G21).

The face of the part extends 2.93 inches from the face of the spindle. The part face is set toZ Zero by the G10 command in block N30. All turning passes will, therefore, be in the NEGA-TIVE Z direction. X Zero is at the spindle centerline.

The tool tip extends 1.25 inches from the turret reference point in the X direction and 2.25inches from the turret reference point in the Z direction. These dimensions will be compensatedfor by the tool offsets activated in block N60.

A maximum spindle speed of 4500 rpm for the operation is established in block N80.

Block N90 establishes CSS mode and a surface speed of 500 surface feet per minute.

The inch per revolution feedrate (G99) is established in block N100 along with a feedrate of.007 inches per revolution.

M-289 10-1

Page 184: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Sample Program:N10 G20 ;N20 G65 P9150 H1.5 ;N30 G10 P0 Z-2.9 ;N7 (Operator Message) ;N40 G97 S1000 M13 ;N50 M98 P1 ;N60 T0707 ;N70 X1.14 Z0.1 ;N80 G50 S4500 ;N90 G96 S500 ;N100 G1 G99 Z0. F0.007 ;N110 X0. ;N120 X1. ;N130 X2. Z-0.5 ;N140 Z-0.75 ;N150 X3. Z-1.25 ;N160 Z-1.5 ;N170 X4.18 ;N180 M98 P1 ;N190 M1 ;N200 M30 ;

A spindle speed MUST be active when entering CSS mode or a Cycle Stop condition will becreated when the first block following the CSS command is encountered.

The spindle speed override, feedrate override, and rapid override functions are active in CSSmode.

SPINDLE ORIENT [Option]

- CAUTION -Due to the fact that the spindle lock pin engages the spindle every 30 degrees,the spindle will NOT be firmly held in position if the commanded orientation an-gle is not a multiple of 30 degrees. It is strongly recommended that spindle orientbe limited to multiples of 30 degrees.

This option enables the programmer to command spindle orientation in increments of one de-gree through the use of the B word. Spindle orientation can only be commanded in relation tothe fixed zero degree position (absolute spindle orient). The spindle is oriented in relation to thefixed zero degree position, with the angle measured in the forward (M03) direction. Refer to“Programming Spindle Orient”, page 10-3.

DETERMINING SPINDLE ORIENTATION

The machine spindle is oriented to the fixed zero degree position when the spindle key is inthe 12 o’clock position.

10-2 M-289

Figure 10.1 - Constant Surface Speed Example

TI1808

SpindleFace

ChuckFace

CL

.400 .500

2.900

1.500

1.250

.750

.500.030 Face Off

1.000

2.000

3.000

4.000

Page 185: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ABSOLUTE SPINDLE ORIENT (C Word)

Absolute spindle orient is commanded through the use of the C word. This absolute angle ismeasured from the fixed zero degree position as defined in the previous section, “DeterminingSpindle Orientation”. The C word can be programmed as a positive (+) or negative (-) value in ablock by itself.

The data word format for the C word is C3.1, with a valid range from 0 to 360 in one tenth ofdegree increments. Decimal point programming is required.

Block Format: N___ C±3.1 ;

INCREMENTAL SPINDLE ORIENT (H Word)

Incremental spindle orient is commanded through the use of the H word. This incremental an-gle is measured from the current spindle position. The H word can be programmed as a positive(+) or negative (-) value in a block by itself. When a positive H word is programmed, the spindleis oriented in the forward (M03) direction from the current spindle position. When a negative Hword is programmed, the spindle is oriented in the reverse (M04) direction from the current spin-dle position.

The data word format for the H word is H3.1, with a valid range from 0 to 360 in one tenth ofdegree increments. Decimal point programming is required.

Block Format: N___ H±3.1 ;

PROGRAMMING SPINDLE ORIENT

- CAUTION -Be sure that no tooling is touching the workpiece when spindle orient is com-manded.

- NOTE -G00 MUST be active when an M19 command is read by the control.

Spindle orient is activated through the use of the M19 spindle orient command in a block byitself. The next data block must contain only the data word that specifies the spindle orientationdesired (C or H word).

Programming spindle orient will automatically deactivate any programmed spindle motion.When the spindle is running and the control reads an M19 spindle orient block, the spindle isstopped at the fixed zero degree position. The control then orients the spindle to the positionspecified by the C or H word, which is programmed in the next data block.

Once spindle orient has been activated through the use of the M19 command, it is only nec-essary to program a C or H word to reorient the spindle, as needed. DO NOT reprogram theM19 command.

M-289 10-3

Page 186: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

Sample Program Blocks

- NOTE -In the following sample spindle orient programming blocks, the block containing theM19 command will only be programmed if spindle orient is not already active. Ifspindle orient has already been activated, it is only necessary to program the datablock containing the C or H word.

The following program blocks will orient the spindle to 150 degrees in the forward (M03) di-rection from the zero degree position:

N___ M19 ;N___ C150. ;

The following program blocks will orient the spindle to 60 degrees in the forward (M03) direc-tion from the current spindle position:

N___ M19 ;N___ H60. ;

The following program blocks will orient the spindle to 120 degrees in the reverse (M04) di-rection from the current spindle position:

N___ M19 ;N___ H-120. ;

CANCELING SPINDLE ORIENT

SUBPROGRAMSThe subprogram feature provides the main part program with the capability of calling fre-

quently repeated patterns from memory, and executing them a specified number of times. Thesubprogram is called from a special block in the main part program. The subprogram must be inmemory, when called.

Subprogram Format:

O____; Subprogram Name

N____; Program Block

N____; .

N____; .

N____; .

M99; Return to calling program

Subprograms stored in memory must be identified by the letter “O” followed by the programnumber in the first data block. See “Program Number”, in Chapter 1.

The last data block of the subprogram MUST contain an M99 command. This commandshould be in a block by itself.

Subprograms may be stored from the MDI keyboard, from a separate tape or floppy disk, orfrom the tape or floppy disk containing the main part program.

10-4 M-289

Page 187: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

MDI KEYBOARD ENTRY

The method for entering subprograms from the MDI keyboard is the same as for main partprograms. Be sure that the first data block contains the subprogram number in the correct for-mat and that the subprogram ends with an M99 command.

1. Press Edit push button “B”, Figure 10.2.

2. Press the Program key.

3. Turn Program Protect key switch “A” OFF.

4. Key in the letter “O” and the subprogram number; then, press the Insert key.

5. Press the End of Block (;) key and press the Insert key.

6. Enter each data block, followed by an EOB (;) character. Press the Insert key after eachdata word.

7. After the entire subprogram has been entered, press the control Reset key.

8. Turn Program Protect key switch “A” ON.

TAPE OR DISK ENTRY

To enter subprograms into memory from a tape or disk, refer to Chapter 8, “Input/Output De-vices”.

M-289 10-5

Figure 10.2 - Operator Control Panel

TI1547

A

B C

Page 188: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

CALLING SUBPROGRAMS

Subprograms are activated by a special “call” block in the main part program which musthave the following format:

M98 Paaabbbb ;

Where:

M98 is the miscellaneous command to activate the subprogram call function.

P is the letter address used to specify the number of times the subprogram is to be per-formed and the subprogram number.

“aaa” specifies the number of times the subprogram is to be performed. The subprogrammay be performed up to 999 times. IF NO VALUE IS ENTERED, THE SUBPROGRAM ISPERFORMED ONCE.

“bbbb” specifies number of the subprogram to be executed.

Sample Program Line #1:

M98 P50100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed five times.)

Sample Program Line #2:

M98 P100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed one time.)

Sample Program Line #3:

M98 P9990100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed 999 times.)

- NOTE -When the subprogram is to be executed just once, use the format shown in sampleprogram line #2. As shown, leading zeros may be omitted from the subprogramnumber when this format is used.

10-6 M-289

Figure 10.3 - CRT/MDI Panel

TI2803A

Page 189: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

SAFE START/END SUBPROGRAM O1The safe start/end subprograms are at the heart of the Hardinge structured programming for-

mat. These subprograms perform the following functions: activate positioning mode, deactivateTNRC, establish ipm feed, and move the turret to the safe index position.

The safe start/end subprograms are written as follows:

INCH MODEO1 (SAFE START SUBPROGRAM) ; Program Number and Operator MessageN1 G01 G40 G97 G98 F390. ; Positioning Mode, Cancel TNRC, Direct RPM, IPM Feed, FeedrateN2 M98 P999 Call Subroutine: Safe IndexN3 M99 ; Return to Calling Program

O2 (SAFE END SUBPROGRAM) ; Program Number and Operator MessageN1 G01 G97 G98 Z.4 F390. ; Positioning Mode, Direct RPM, Z Pullback, IPM Feed, FeedrateN2 G40 ; Cancel TNRCN3 M98 P999 Call Subroutine: Safe IndexN4 M1 ; Optional StopN5 M99 ; Return to Calling Program

O999 (SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM) Program Number and Operator MessageN1 T0 ; Cancel Tool OffsetN2 X___ Z___ ; X and Z Axis Safe Index PositionN3 M99 ; Return to Calling Program

- CAUTION -The Z entry (pullback) in subprogram O2 must be converted to 10 millimeters ifthe machine is to be run in metric mode.

Safe start and end subprograms 1 and 2 are to be permanently loaded into the control mem-ory. They are designed for machine safety and to help simplify programming.

Subprogram 999 is loaded into the control memory and is used to cancel the active tool offsetand command the safe index coordinates desired for the job.

O1 SAFE START SUBPROGRAM

The command M98 P1 is used at the start of every tool operation. This ensures that theproper G codes are active and the turret is in a safe position before indexing.

O2 SAFE END SUBPROGRAM

The command M98 P2 is used at the end of every tool operation. This ensures that theproper G codes are active and returns the turret to a safe position before indexing.

O999 SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM

Subprogram O999 is nested in subprograms O1 and O2. This subprogram cancels theactive tool offset and commands the turret to return to the X and Z axis safe index coordi-nates.

The X axis safe index position in subprogram O999 should be set to a value appropriatefor the job being run

The Z Axis safe positioning coordinate in subprogram O999 should be equal to theLONGEST TOOL on the tooling top plate PLUS 1 inch (25 millimeters).

M-289 10-7

Page 190: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

HARDINGE PERMANENT MACRO PROGRAMSHardinge permanent macro programs are assigned 9000 series program numbers. These per-

manent macro programs cannot be edited. As with other macro programs, the permanent mac-ros are called as follows:

G65 Pxxxx y ;

Where:

G65 = Macro call commandP = Required format letterXxxx = Macro program numberY = Macro variable(s), if required; = End of Block character

MACRO 9111: SAFE TOOL OFFSET

- CAUTION -This macro program should only be used on machines set up for operation ininch mode. DO NOT use this macro program for machines set up for metricoperation.

This macro program resets ALL tool offset registers. Any tool offsets already en-tered will be lost.

This macro must be executed from a program. Otherwise, an indefinite loop is produced andthe control will hang itself up executing the cycle indefinitely. It is recommended that the follow-ing program be loaded into the control memory, to be executed as needed:

Sample Program:

O8999 :G65 P9111 ;M30 ;

G65 P9112 is interpreted as follows:

G65 = Macro call command

P = Required format letter

9111 = Macro program number

; = End of Block character

To ensure safe machine operation, this macro program has been developed to reset the ma-chine coordinate system offsets in the following manner:

1. All Tool Wear Offset registers are set to zero.

2. All R (Radius) and T (Quadrant) Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to zero.

3. All X Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to zero.

4. All Z Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to 9.9999.

10-8 M-289

Page 191: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

MACRO 9135: DEEP HOLE DRILLING

An explanation of Macro 9135 is presented in Chapter 6.

MACRO 9150: COLLET DWELL

Collet Dwell macro 9150 MUST be programmed near the beginning of the part program, be-fore any machining blocks are programmed. If this command is not programmed, the followingconditions will occur:

1. The time delay for manual operation of the collet closer will default to 4.9 seconds and willremain the same unless changed with the Collet Dwell macro.

2. When changing jobs or programs, unless the control is turned OFF or a new delay time isprogrammed, the time setting established by the previously active program will be active.This may cause one of the following conditions to occur:

A) Cycle Start will be activated before the work-holding device is fully closed.

B) Delay time will be excessive for the type of work-holding device and collet closer pres-sure being used.

- WARNING -Failing to program an appropriate collet dwell could create unsafe operatingconditions.

Timer Range: 1.0 to 4.9 seconds

Minimum Increment: .1 seconds

Default Value: 4.9 seconds

Recommended SettingsTo ensure maximum safety during machining cycles, the collet closer delay time MUST be

programmed for each job. The collet closer pressure setting and the type of spindle tooling to beused must be known to determine the correct dwell time. Refer to the chart and instructionswhich follow when programming the collet closer dwell macro.

Collet CloserPressure Setting

Collet orStep Chuck

4 InchJaw Chuck

20 - 30 psi 4.9 seconds Not Recommended

30 - 40 psi 3.0 seconds Not Recommended

40 - 50 psi 2.0 seconds 4.9 seconds

50 - 60 psi 1.5 seconds 2.5 seconds

The timer can be set from 1.0 to 4.9 seconds; however, the settings listed above are recom-mended.

M-289 10-9

Page 192: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

To Set The DelayThe collet closer timer delay is set by calling Macro Program 9150 near the beginning of the

main part program, as follows:

BLOCK FORMAT: G65 P9150 Hx. ;

Where:

G65 = Macro call command

P = Required format letter

9150 = Macro program number

H = Required data letter

x = Time delay value (Decimal point must be programmed)

; = End of Block character

Program Collet Dwell macro 9150 near the beginning of the main part program. The dataword format is H1.1 with a valid range from 1.0 to 4.9, in increments of .1 seconds.

Example: O3333 ; (Program Number)

G20 ; (Select Inch Mode)

G65 P9150 H2. ; (Collet closer dwell is set to 2.0 seconds)

.

.

.

- NOTE -The H word in the G65 block can be replaced with a D word. The D word will beprogrammed and interpreted exactly like the H word.

10-10 M-289

Page 193: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

ENGLISH/METRIC MODEThe Setting page is used to establish whether the GE Fanuc 18T control is to power-up and

operate in English mode or Metric mode. This section outlines the procedure for selecting thedesired operating mode.

Through the use of the G20 (Inch Mode) and G21 (Metric Mode) commands, It is possible tooperate in either mode regardless of which mode has been selected on the Setting page. How-ever, the use of these two G codes will not automatically adjust the position registers to displaythe position values in the proper units (inches vs millimeters).

- CAUTION -Part programs should usually be written in the same format as selected on theSetting page. Programs not written in the same format as established on the Set-ting page MUST contain the appropriate English/Metric G code, G20/G21 respec-tively. When required, this G code must be programmed by itself in the first datablock.

When the operating mode is changed, the work shift and tool offsets are NOT automaticallychanged to the appropriate units. They must be changed manually.

- NOTE -After the Input Unit field on the Setting page has been modified, a Zero Return(Reference Home) operation must be performed. If necessary, refer to Chapter 2 ofthe CHNC® III lathe operator’s manual (M-290) for the Zero Return procedure.

ESTABLISHING ENGLISH/METRIC MODE

1. Press the Offset Setting function key.

2. Press the Setting soft key.

3. If necessary, use the Page keys to display the Setting page.

4. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Input Unit field.

5. Press Manual Data Input push button “C”, Figure 10.2.

6. Turn the Program Protect key switch “A” OFF.

7. Key in the appropriate number (0:MM 1:INCH).

8. Press the Input key.

9. Turn the Program Protect key switch ON.

10. Perform a Zero Return operation. The machine will be set to the desired operating mode.

M-289 10-11

Page 194: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

10-12 M-289

Page 195: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

APPENDIX

M-289 A-1

Figure A.1 - Turret Top Plate Travel Specifications:Eight Station Top Plate

TI1820

CL

1.700-X LS

1.600-X Software Limit

3.200+X LS

3.100+X Software Limit

3.000X Home Position

12.000Z Home Position12.550

+Z Software Limit

12.600+Z LS

+Z

+X

.385 -Z LS

.450 -Z Software Limit

CL

Turret

Spindle

Figure A.2 - Turret Top Plate Travel Specifications:Optional Four Station Gang Tool Top Plate

TI1819

CL

1.650-X LS 1.600

-X Software Limit

3.150+X LS

3.100+X Software Limit

3.000X Home Position

12.000Z Home Position

12.500+Z Software Limit

12.600+Z LS

+Z

+X

.370 -Z LS

.450 -Z Software Limit

CL

Turret

Spindle

Page 196: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

A-2 M-289

Figure A.3 - Turret Top Plate Dimensions:Eight Station Top Plate

TI1817

3.375

8.000

.410

.641

.750

.312A

4.000

Tooling “A”

3/8” 1.3115

1/2” 1.1865

10mm 1.2920

Page 197: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

M-289 A-3

Figure A.4 - Turret Top Plate Dimensions:Optional Four Station Gang Tool Top Plate

TI1818

3.375

8.000

.410

.641

.750

.312A

Tooling “A”

3/8” 1.3115

1/2” 1.1865

4.000

Page 198: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

G CODES

CODE GROUP DEFINITION

G00 1 Rapid Traverse Positioning ModeG01 1 Linear InterpolationG02 1 Counterclockwise Circular InterpolationG03 1 Clockwise Circular InterpolationG04 0 DwellG10 0 Offset Value SettingG20 6 Inch Data InputG21 6 Metric Data InputG22 9 Stored Stroke Limits ONG23 9 Stored Stroke Limits OFFG32 1 Threadcutting Routine (Constant Lead)G34 1 Threadcutting Routine (Variable Lead) [OPTION]G40 7 Cancel Tool Nose Radius CompensationG41 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Left)G42 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Right)G50 0 Maximum RPM Limit Used With CSS (G96)G65 0 User Macro CallG70 0 Automatic Finishing CycleG71 0 Automatic Rough Turning CycleG72 0 Automatic Rough Facing CycleG73 0 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat CycleG74 0 Automatic Drilling CycleG75 0 Automatic Grooving CycleG76 0 Automatic Threading CycleG90 1 Canned Turning CycleG92 1 Canned Threading CycleG94 1 Canned Facing CycleG96 2 Constant Surface SpeedG97 2 Direct RPM ProgrammingG98 5 Inches/mm per Minute FeedrateG99 5 Inches/mm per Revolution Feedrate

A-4 M-289

Page 199: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

STANDARD M CODESM00 Program Stop

M01 Optional Stop

M02 End of Program

M03 Spindle Forward

M04 Spindle Reverse

M05 Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF

M08 Coolant ON

M09 Coolant OFF

M13 Spindle Forward/Coolant ON

M14 Spindle Reverse/Coolant ON

M21 Open Collet

M22 Close Collet

M28 External Chucking Mode

M29 Internal Chucking Mode

M30 End of Program

M31 Program Rewind and Restart

M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Speed Overrides

M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Speed Overrides

M98 Subprogram Call

M99 Subprogram End

OPTIONAL M CODESM23 Vertical Slide IN

M24 Vertical Slide and/or Part Chute IN

M25 Vertical Slide and/or Part Chute Retract

M26 Part Chute IN

M-289 A-5

Page 200: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

PMC GENERATED ALARMS

1000 LOW MAIN AIR

Low air pressure to machine.

The control is put in an alarm condition and the machine in E-stop.

1001 SPINDLE DRIVE FAULT

Spindle drive/motor overload condition. The control is put in an alarm condition and themachine in E-stop.

1003 BAD COLLET SWITCH

Collet Close/Open pressure switches are faulty. Spindle pressure switch inputs indicatesame state for more than 3.5 seconds. The control is put in an alarm condition.

1004 CLT DLY NOT PRG

Collet delay not programmed. The control is put in an alarm condition.

1006 X+ OVERTRAVEL

X-Axis overtravel condition in X+ direction. The control is put in an alarm condition and themachine in E-stop.

1007 X- OVERTRAVEL

X-Axis overtravel condition in X- direction. The control is put in an alarm condition and themachine in E-stop.

1008 Z+ OVERTRAVEL

Z-Axis overtravel condition in Z+ direction. The control is put in an alarm condition and themachine in E-stop.

1009 Z- OVERTRAVEL

Z-Axis overtravel condition in Z- direction. The control is put in an alarm condition and themachine in E-stop.

1010 TOOL TOUCH OPTION INSTALLED

Tool touch probe software option has been turned ON, but tool touch hardware not installed.The control is put in an alarm condition.

1011 TOUCH PROBE COVER OFF

Cover for tool touch probe is removed while the machine is in AUTO, MDI, or SINGLE mode.Machine must be in JOG mode when cover is removed.

1012 COOLANT SWITCH FAULT

Coolant High and Coolant Low inputs both ON. The control is put in an alarm condition andthe machine in E-stop.

1811 VERIFY GUARD DOOR SW(S)

Machine power-up message. Open and close front guard doors to verify proper switchoperation.

A-6 M-289

Page 201: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

PMC GENERATED MESSAGES

2002 LUBE SYSTEM FAILURE

Lubrication system fault. The machine is put into a reset condition. All axis motion stops,coolant and air blast are automatically turned OFF.

Check and repair lubrication system.

2003 ZERO RETURN X AND Z AXES

Machine Power-Up message. Zero Return the X and Z axes.

2004 T900 PROGRAMMED

The T word exceeds the maximum number of turret stations on the top plate.

T word format error.

2006 ILLEGAL M CODE

M word is programmed for an option not available/enabled on the machine.

M word is not defined in the control.

M word format error.

2013 PROGRAM STOP

Part program execution stopped through the use of an M00 or M01 command.

2014 END OF PROGRAM

Part program execution completed. M02 or M30 read by the CNC control.

2017 SPINDLE LOCKPIN ENGAGED

Spindle lock pin pin has been enaged. Manual spindle rotation and spindle jog disabled.

2018 COOLANT LEVEL IS LOW

Low coolant level. Refer to the CHNC® III Machine Operator’s Manual (M-290) forinformation on refilling the coolant tank.

2019 WAY LUBE LEVEL IS LOW

Low oil level in main lubricator. Refer to the CHNC III Machine Operator’s Manual (M-290) forinformation on refilling the main lubricator.

2020 AIR LUBE LEVEL IS LOW

Low oil level in air line lubricator. Refer to the CHNC III Machine Operator’s Manual (M-290)for information on refilling the air line lubricator.

2021 COOLANT LEVEL IS HIGH

High coolant level. Refer to the CHNC III Machine Operator’s Manual (M-290) for informationon draining the coolant tank.

2022 TURRET POSITION INCORRECT

Turret top plate not at last programmed station after a manual index. Press control Reset toclear message.

M-289 A-7

Page 202: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

2023 SPINDLE BRAKE FAULT

Spindle brake pressure switch input contradicts the state of the brake solenoid valve.(Spindle free lamp indicates status of brake solenoid).

2024 FRONT CLNT GRD NOT CLOSED

Front coolant guard is not closed while the machine is in AUTO, MDI, or SINGLE mode.Cycle Start is inhibited.

2025 REAR CLNT GRD NOT CLOSED

Rear coolant guard is not closed while the machine is in AUTO, MDI, or SINGLE mode. CycleStart is inhibited.

2028 TURRET NOT PROPERLY SEATED

Turret top plate not properly seated. Turret index time exceeds two seconds. Turret proximityswitch is faulty.

Turret index has been interrupted by control Reset or E-Stop. Perform turret zero returnprocedure.

Refer to the CHNC® III Machine Operator’s Manual (M-290) for instructions on performingthe turret zero return procedure.

2029 M28 OR M29 PROGRAMMING ERROR

Format error when programming M28 or M29. Refer to the CHNC III Machine Operator’sManual (M-290) for information on setting M28 (External Chucking Mode) or M29 (InternalChucking Mode).

2030 END OF BAR DETECTED

End of bar condition exists.

2031 BARFEED FAULT

Bar Feed tube out of position. Hydraulic motor protection relay trip condition.

2036 COLLET OPEN

Spindle collet/chuck is open.

2037 PART ACCESS DOOR OPEN

Interlocked access door is open. Cycle start is inhibited until the door is closed.

A-8 M-289

Page 203: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

- NOTES -

M-289 A-9

Page 204: PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL Machines/M -0009500-0289.pdf · 2008-01-30 · PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL and Super-Precision CNC Lathes Equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T Control Manual No. M-289 Litho

“Performance Has Established Leadership for Hardinge”®

Hardinge Inc.Elmira, New York 14902-1507 USA

Phone: 607-734-2281 FAX: 607-734-8819www.hardinge.com